2016 Mkc

User Manual: 2016-mkc

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 432 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Owner’s Manual
2016 MKC
May 2015
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Lincoln MKC
Litho in U.S.A.
GJ7J 19A321 AA
2016 MKC Owner’s Manual
owner.lincoln.com lincolncanada.com
Information Provided by:
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design
or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any
form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20150413002934
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
Introduction
About This Manual............................................7
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65................................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Lincoln Automotive Financial
Services..........................................................11
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Special Notices.................................................13
Mobile Communications Equipment...........14
Export Unique Options...................................14
Environment
Protecting the Environment..........................15
Child Safety
General Information........................................16
Installing Child Seats......................................18
Booster Seats..................................................24
Child Seat Positioning....................................27
Child Safety Locks..........................................28
Safety Belts
Principle of Operation...................................30
Fastening the Safety Belts............................31
Safety Belt Height Adjustment....................34
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime............................................................35
Safety Belt Minder..........................................36
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance................................................38
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™..............................40
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation.....................................41
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................42
Front Passenger Sensing System..............44
Side Airbags.....................................................47
Driver Knee Airbag.........................................48
Safety Canopy™...............................................48
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........49
Airbag Disposal................................................51
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies.................................................52
Remote Control...............................................53
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control..........................................................56
MyKey™
Principle of Operation....................................57
Creating a MyKey...........................................58
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................59
Checking MyKey System Status..................61
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................62
MyKey Troubleshooting................................62
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................64
Manual Liftgate................................................69
Power Liftgate..................................................70
Keyless Entry....................................................73
1
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Information Provided by:
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System............................77
Anti-Theft Alarm..............................................78
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel......................79
Audio Control..................................................80
Voice Control....................................................81
Cruise Control...................................................81
Information Display Control..........................81
Heated Steering Wheel................................82
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers..........................................83
Autowipers.......................................................84
Windshield Washers......................................85
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............85
Lighting
General Information.......................................87
Lighting Control...............................................87
Autolamps.........................................................88
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................89
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................90
Daytime Running Lamps...............................90
Automatic High Beam Control.....................91
Direction Indicators........................................92
Welcome Lighting...........................................92
Interior Lamps..................................................93
Ambient Lighting.............................................93
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows..............................................94
Global Opening and Closing.......................95
Exterior Mirrors................................................95
Interior Mirror...................................................98
Sun Visors.........................................................99
Moonroof..........................................................99
Instrument Cluster
Gauges............................................................102
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................104
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............107
Information Displays
General Information.....................................109
Information Messages..................................115
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control..........................133
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................135
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................136
Cabin Air Filter................................................137
Remote Start...................................................137
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position....................139
Head Restraints.............................................139
Power Seats....................................................142
Memory Function..........................................144
Rear Seats.......................................................145
Heated Seats..................................................146
Climate Controlled Seats.............................147
Rear Seat Armrest.........................................148
Universal Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener................150
2
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Information Provided by:
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.................................155
Storage Compartments
Center Console..............................................157
Overhead Console........................................157
Ticket Holders................................................157
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information......................................158
Keyless Starting.............................................158
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................159
Engine Block Heater....................................162
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions........................................163
Fuel Quality.....................................................164
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................165
Running Out of Fuel.....................................165
Refueling.........................................................166
Fuel Consumption.........................................168
Emission Control System............................169
Transmission
Automatic Transmission...............................172
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive..................................178
Brakes
General Information......................................183
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..........................................................183
Electric Parking Brake..................................184
Hill Start Assist...............................................186
Traction Control
Principle of Operation..................................188
Using Traction Control.................................188
Stability Control
Principle of Operation..................................190
Using Stability Control..................................191
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation..................................192
Rear Parking Aid............................................193
Front Parking Aid...........................................193
Active Park Assist..........................................194
Rear View Camera........................................199
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.................................203
Using Cruise Control...................................203
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................204
Driving Aids
Driver Alert......................................................213
Lane Keeping System..................................214
Blind Spot Information System..................219
Cross Traffic Alert..........................................221
Steering..........................................................225
Collision Warning System..........................226
Drive Control.................................................229
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage...........................231
Luggage Covers............................................231
Roof Racks and Load Carriers...................231
3
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Information Provided by:
Load Limit.......................................................232
Towing
Towing a Trailer.............................................240
Trailer Sway Control.....................................241
Recommended Towing Weights...............241
Essential Towing Checks............................244
Transporting the Vehicle.............................247
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........247
Driving Hints
Breaking-In.....................................................249
Economical Driving......................................249
Driving Through Water...............................250
Floor Mats......................................................250
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...................................252
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................253
Fuel Shutoff...................................................253
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................254
Post-Crash Alert System............................256
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need................258
In California (U.S. Only)...............................259
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................260
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only)............................................261
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada........................................................261
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature....................................................263
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)......263
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)............................................................264
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart............................265
Changing a Fuse...........................................281
Maintenance
General Information.....................................282
Opening and Closing the Hood...............282
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................284
Under Hood Overview - 2.3L
EcoBoost™..................................................286
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................288
Engine Oil Check.........................................288
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................289
Engine Coolant Check................................289
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check......293
Brake Fluid Check........................................293
Washer Fluid Check....................................293
Fuel Filter........................................................294
Changing the 12V Battery..........................294
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................296
Changing the Wiper Blades......................296
Adjusting the Headlamps...........................297
Removing a Headlamp...............................298
Changing a Bulb...........................................299
Bulb Specification Chart.............................300
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................302
Vehicle Care
General Information.....................................304
Cleaning Products........................................304
Cleaning the Exterior..................................304
4
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Information Provided by:
Waxing............................................................305
Cleaning the Engine....................................306
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades.........................................................306
Cleaning the Interior....................................307
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................309
Cleaning Leather Seats...............................310
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..................310
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.........................310
Vehicle Storage...............................................311
Wheels and Tires
General Information......................................313
Tire Care..........................................................315
Using Snow Chains......................................329
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.............330
Changing a Road Wheel.............................334
Technical Specifications.............................340
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications..................................342
Motorcraft Parts............................................343
Vehicle Identification Number...................344
Vehicle Certification Label.........................344
Transmission Code Designation..............345
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................346
Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™...................................................351
Audio System
General Information.....................................358
Audio Unit......................................................359
Media Hub.......................................................361
Accessories
Accessories...................................................362
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).....................364
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information...........367
Normal Scheduled Maintenance...............371
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................375
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............379
Appendices
End User License Agreement...................399
5
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Information Provided by:
6
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Provided by:
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Lincoln. We
recommend that you take some time to get
to know your vehicle by reading this manual.
The more that you know about it, the greater
the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to your
vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual
may show features as used in different
models, so may appear different to you on
your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your
vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.
7
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Information Provided by:
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten safety belt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
8
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Information Provided by:
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Ford Motor Company, Ford of
Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle
diagnostic information received through a
direct connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
9
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Information Provided by:
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company, Ford
of Canada, and service and repair facilities
may access or share among them data for
vehicle improvement purposes. For U.S. only
(if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that
certain diagnostic information may also be
accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic information
may be used for any purpose.
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The event data recorder is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
•How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
•Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions
and Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford
of Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
10
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Information Provided by:
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies
to SYNC or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is
enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through
any paired and connected cell phone,
disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or, in certain
vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of being used
to electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details
about the vehicle or crash or personal
information about the occupants to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not activate the 911 Assist feature.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic,
Directions and Information (if equipped,
U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology
and advanced vehicle sensors to collect
the vehicle’s current location, travel
direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with
the directions, traffic reports, or business
searches that you request. If you do not
want Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the service. For
more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Some constituents of engine exhaust,
certain vehicle components, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, safety belt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE
FINANCIAL SERVICES
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. We are
dedicated to providing answers, information
and a truly extraordinary experience.
11
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Information Provided by:
Use the options below to contact us with
questions about your account or financing
and we will respond promptly:
Web Address
www.LincolnAFS.com
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
Mail: Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
P.O. Box 542000
Omaha, NE 68154-8000
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever
your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s
Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
meet or exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural
integrity, corrosion protection and dent
resistance. During vehicle development we
validate these parts deliver the intended
level of protection as a whole system. A great
way to know for sure you are getting this
level of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Lincoln Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered
by the Lincoln Warranty. For additional
information, refer to the terms and conditions
of the Lincoln Warranty.
12
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Information Provided by:
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered
and what is not covered by your vehicle’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the
Warranty Manual that is provided to you
along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not follow
the instruction highlighted by the warning
symbol. Failure to follow the specific
warnings and instructions could result in
personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
system has a data port for diagnostics, repair
and reprogramming services with diagnostic
scan tools. Installing a non-Ford-approved
aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause
interference or damage to vehicle systems.
We do not recommend or endorse the use
of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD
plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty may
not cover damage caused by any
non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD plug-in
device.
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and
Utility Type Vehicles
WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read
this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle is
not a passenger car. As with other vehicles
of this type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a
snowplowing package.
Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package.
13
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Information Provided by:
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when
using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for Export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
14
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Information Provided by:
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
15
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Environment
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on
how to properly use safety restraints for
children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is secured
properly in a device that is appropriate
for their height, age and weight. Child safety
restraints must be bought separately from
your vehicle. Failure to follow these
instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
WARNINGS
All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints
are based on probable child height, age and
weight thresholds from National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. Ford recommends
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly installed in
your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll
free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check
with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST or for further information,
contact your provincial ministry of
WARNINGS
transportation, locate your local St. John
Ambulance office by searching for St. John
Ambulance on the internet, or Transport
Canada at 1-800-333-0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made
especially for their height, age, and weight
may result in an increased risk of serious
injury or death to your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days,
the temperature in the trunk or vehicle
interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of
people or animals to these high
temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries,
including brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
16
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint typeChild size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Infants or toddlers
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child
safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt
snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt
centered across the shoulder and chest, and
seat back upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-
positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft.
9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
17
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
•You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
•Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a height
of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80
pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of children
in your vehicle.
•When possible, always properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in a front
seating position. See Front Passenger
Sensing System (page 44).
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block access
to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
18
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
•Use the correct safety belt buckle for that
seating position.
•Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
•Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the safety seat, with
the tongue between the child seat and
the release button, to prevent accidental
unbuckling.
•Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
•Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing
the child seat with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a
forward facing child seat, the steps are the
same for installing a rear facing child seat.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
19
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until all of
the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that will exist once the extra weight of
20
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
the child is added to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward
the buckle will additionally help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 inch
(2.5 centimeters) of movement for
proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a
Certified Passenger Seat Technician.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats to
the same anchor. In a crash, one
anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may
break, causing serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block access
to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where the seatback and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to the two lower anchors at the
LATCH equipped seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use safety belts to
21
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
attach the child seat, however the safety belt
can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether
strap must also be attached to the proper
top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child seat.
E142535
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation. The LATCH anchors
are located at the rear section of the rear
seat between the cushion and seatback.
Follow the child seat manufacturer's
instructions to properly install a child seat
with LATCH attachments. Follow the
instructions on attaching child safety seats
with tether straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child
seat only to the anchors.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating
Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center seating
position unless the child seat manufacturer's
instructions permit and specify using anchors
spaced at least as far apart as those in this
vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches
(46 centimeters) apart. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at
the center seating position. LATCH
compatible child seats (with attachments on
belt webbing) can only be used at this
seating position provided that the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit use with
the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a
child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent
child seat is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that
the seat is properly attached to the lower
anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug
the child seat from side to side and forward
and back where it is secured to your vehicle.
The seat should move less than one inch
when you do this for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety
belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be
attached first, provided a proper installation
is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward,
if included with the child seat.
22
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child
safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point
called the top tether anchor. Tether straps
are available as an accessory for many older
safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat
for information about ordering a tether strap,
or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the
appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been installed
using either the safety belt, the lower
anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you
can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are
in the following positions (shown from top
view):
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a child
safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat. For outboard
seating positions, route the tether strap
under the head restraint and between
the head restraint posts. For the center
seating positions, route the tether strap
over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, the head restraints can also be
removed.
E142538
2. Locate the correct anchor on the back
panel of the rear seat for the selected
seating position. The anchors are labeled
with the tether strap symbol and are
partially covered by the gap panel. Pull
the panel back to fully expose the
anchors.
23
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
E142539
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions. If your child restraint system
is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends
its use, Ford also recommends its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80
pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100
pounds (45 kilograms) if recommended by
your child restraint manufacturer). Many state
and provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach age
eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
E142595
•Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat back with knees bent
comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
•Can the child sit without slouching?
•Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
•Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
•Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
24
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
•Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat back
or no head restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child's head (as measured at
the tops of the ears) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a higher seat
back or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
•High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The
following drawings compare the ideal fit
(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
25
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
E142596
E142597
26
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check with
the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
When possible, all children age 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a rear
seating position. If all children cannot be
seated and restrained properly in a rear
seating position, properly restrain the largest
child in the front seat.
WARNINGS
Always carefully follow the instructions
and warnings provided by the
manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly
installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your
child's height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of
serious injury or death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result
in serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Never use pillows, books, or towels to
boost a child. They can slide around
and increase the likelihood of injury or death
in a crash.
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
27
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined weight of
child and child seat
Restraint Type Safety belt onlySafety belt and
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
Safety belt and top
tether anchor
LATCH (lower
anchors only)
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against
the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It
may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See Seats (page 139).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
28
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the rear
edge of each rear door and must be set
separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise
to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise
to unlock.
29
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure
children sit where they can be properly
restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety
belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a
pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt
under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt
around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one
person.
When possible, all children 12 years old
and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNINGS
Safety belts and seats can become hot
in a vehicle that has been closed up in
sunny weather; they could burn a small child.
Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum protection in
an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap
and shoulder safety belts. All occupants of
the vehicle should always properly wear their
safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
•lap and shoulder safety belts
•shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety belt)
•height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions
30
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
•retractor and anchor pretensioner at the
front outboard seating positions
•belt tension sensor at the front outboard
passenger seating position
•safety belt warning light and chime
•crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed
to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes, and in rollovers. The safety belt
pretensioners on the retractor and anchor at
the front seating positions are designed to
tighten the safety belts firmly against the
occupant's body when activated. This helps
increase the effectiveness of the safety belts.
In frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners can be activated alone or, if
the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags.
FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints
in the vehicle are combination lap and
shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the
tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the buckle.
E142589
31
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
When in use, the rear safety belts should be
placed in the belt guides on the outboard
seatbacks.
Using a Sliding Clip (If Equipped)
E200788
Slide the clip away from the tongue so there
is no loose webbing when an occupant or
child seat is buckled up. You can also use
the sliding clip to raise the tongue and
prevent it from rattling or to ease access to
the tongue.
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned
low across the hips. The shoulder portion of
the safety belt should be positioned across
the chest. Pregnant women should also
follow this practice. See the following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should be
positioned low across the hips below the
belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow.
The shoulder belt should be positioned to
cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety belt
system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking
retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all safety
belts should be checked for proper function.
Belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature or any
other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized
dealer. Failure to replace the belt and
retractor assembly could increase the risk of
injury in crashes.
32
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the first type of locking
mode, and the front outboard passenger and
rear seat safety belts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length adjustment
to your movements and locking in response
to vehicle movement. For example, if the
driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
combination safety belts will lock to help
reduce forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If this
occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull
webbing out again in a slow and controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed in
passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See Child Safety (page
16).
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out.
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the automatic
locking mode.
33
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
turn on the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
How to Extract Safety Belts in the Rear
Outboard Positions
Safety belts in the rear outboard positions
can lock if the seatback is returned firmly to
its upright position. You can unlock the safety
belts using the following procedures.
For vehicles where the rear seats recline:
1. Recline the seat to its full rear recline
position.
2. The safety belt should then unlock.
3. Return the seatback to its desired upright
position.
For vehicles with rear seats that do not
recline or are locked with the seat in its full
rear recline position:
1. Grasp the safety belt webbing at the top
of the seatback.
2. Pull the safety belt webbing forward,
firmly.
3. After pulling the safety belt forward, allow
the safety belt to feed back into the
safety belt retractor as much as possible.
If necessary, press the seatback down to
allow the safety belt webbing to retract
further.
4. The safety belt should then unlock.
5. If the safety belt does not unlock, repeat
steps 1-3.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, you can obtain a safety belt
extension assembly from an authorized
dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is on a label
located either at the end of the webbing or
on the retractor behind the trim. Also, use
the safety belt extension only if the safety
belt is too short for you when fully extended.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height adjusters
so that the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt correctly could reduce the effectiveness
of the safety belt and increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
34
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
E87511
To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze
the button and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned
on.
35
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning
chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is
turned to the on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off.The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated
and the warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off.The driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned
to the on position...
SAFETY BELT MINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front
passenger sensing system to determine if a
front seat passenger is present and therefore
potentially in need of a warning. To avoid
activating the Belt-Minder feature for objects
you place in the front passenger seat, only
the front seat passengers receive warnings
as determined by the front passenger
sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings
for about five minutes) for one passenger
(driver or front passenger), the other
passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder
feature to turn on.
36
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts before you
switch the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch
the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your safety belts before
your vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about
1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and
more than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
37
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder
Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system activated
for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
•The parking brake is set.
•The transmission is in park (P) or neutral
(N).
•The ignition is off.
•The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the procedure
within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching
off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
three times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
safety belt warning light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is on,
buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt.
After Step 4, the safety belt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
•This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
•This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY
BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make sure
they work properly and are not damaged.
Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts
to make sure there are no nicks, tears or
cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety
belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),
shoulder belt guide on seat back (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a crash. Read the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions for
additional inspection and maintenance
information specific to the child restraint.
38
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However, if
the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a crash should
also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 304).
39
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and
crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System consists
of:
•Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
•Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and safety belt usage sensors.
•Driver seat position sensor.
•Front passenger sensing system.
•Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
•Front crash severity sensors.
•Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
•Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
•The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensors, safety belt pretensioners, front
safety belt usage sensors, driver seat
position sensor, front passenger sensing
system and indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a crash,
the restraints control module may deploy the
safety belt pretensioners, one or both stages
of the dual-stage airbags based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
40
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Personal Safety System™
Information Provided by:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently,
and the risk of injury from a deploying
airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Always transport children 12 years old
and under in the back seat and always
properly use appropriate child restraints.
Failure to follow this could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you could
be seriously injured or killed. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components get
hot after inflation. Do not touch them
after inflation as this may result in serious
injury.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for
example, baking soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the airbag.
Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic.
41
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying
airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force,
there is the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation
area may cause those objects to be
propelled by the airbag into your face and
torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
•Driver and passenger airbag modules.
•Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 49).
42
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends
a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25
centimeters) between an occupant’s chest
and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
•Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
•Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on safety belts, it is very important
that they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seat back, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
43
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under should
be properly restrained in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far can
take off weight from the seat cushion and
affect the decision of the front passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash. Always sit upright against
your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger sensing
system which could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are part
of the front passenger seat and safety belt
to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the front
passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
E177067
The front passenger sensing system uses a
passenger airbag status indicator that will
illuminate indicating that the front passenger
frontal airbag is either ON (enabled) or OFF
(disabled).
The indicator lamp is located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON indicator lamps will illuminate
for a short period of time when the ignition
is first turned on to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear
facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even
with this technology, parents are strongly
encouraged to always properly restrain
children in the rear seat. The sensor also
turns off the passenger front airbag and
seat-mounted side airbag when the
passenger seat is empty.
•When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag, the passenger
airbag status indicator will illuminate the
OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
•If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the ON lamp, then turn the
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
44
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the front passenger seat.
•When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger
airbag status indicator will illuminate the
ON lamp and remain illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator
lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is not
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
•Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the full upright
position.
•Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
•Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger frontal airbag.
•If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit even
after this, the person should be advised
to ride in the rear seat.
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status indicatorOccupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
45
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on safety belts, it is very important
that they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seatback, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
If you think that the status of the passenger
airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, check
for the following:
•Objects lodged underneath the seat.
•Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
•Objects hanging off the seatback.
•Objects stowed in the seatback map
pocket.
•Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
•Cargo interference with the seat
•Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
•Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to be
incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger
sensing system. The person in the front
passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter
due to the conditions described in the list
above.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors and
Airbag Indicator (page 49).
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the
following:
The driver and adult passengers should
check for objects lodged underneath the
front passenger seat, or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If there are lodged objects, or cargo is
interfering with the seat, take the following
steps to remove the obstruction:
•Pull the vehicle over.
•Turn the vehicle off.
•Driver and adult passengers should
check for any objects lodged underneath
the front passenger seat or cargo
interfering with the seat.
•Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
•Restart the vehicle.
•Wait at least two minutes and verify that
the airbag readiness light is no longer
illuminated.
•If the airbag readiness light remains
illuminated, this may or may not be a
problem due to the front passenger
sensing system.
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to an
authorized dealer.
46
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front
airbag system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center. See Getting the
Services You Need (page 258).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag cover,
on the side of the seatbacks (of the front
seats), or in front seat areas that may come
into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The
use of accessory seat covers may
prevent the deployment of the side airbags
and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat
cover on a seat containing an airbag as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The side
airbag system (including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the outboard
side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In
certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the
side affected by the crash will be inflated.
The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants
in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
•A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted to
your vehicle.
•Side airbags located inside the driver and
front passenger seatbacks.
•Front passenger sensing system.
•Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 49).
47
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side
airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures
help reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags.
DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG
A driver's knee airbag is located under the
instrument panel. During a crash, the
restraints control module may activate the
driver's knee airbag based on crash severity
and occupant conditions. Under certain crash
and occupant conditions, the driver’s knee
airbag may deploy but the driver’s front
airbag may not activate. As with front and
side airbags, it is important to be properly
seated and restrained to reduce the risk of
death or serious injury.
Make sure the knee airbag is
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 49).
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner at
the siderail that may come into contact with
a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
curtain airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on
a vehicle containing curtain airbags as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNINGS
All occupants of your vehicle including
the driver should always wear their
safety belts even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system and curtain
airbag is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct
or place objects in the deployment
path of the curtain airbag.
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including the A,
B and C pillar trim and headliner) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced,
the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected by
the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is
mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
48
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover
events, the Safety Canopy will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The
Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between
the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side
impact crashes and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
•Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front and
rear side windows identified by a label
or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
•A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 49).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a group
of automotive safety experts known as the
Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These
recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags (including the
Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to the
front end of your vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body structure and
tow hooks) may affect the performance of
the airbag system, increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify the front end of your
vehicle.
49
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide information
to the restraints control module which
deploys (activates) the front safety belt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side
airbags, and the Safety Canopy. Based on
the type of accident (frontal impact, side
impact or rollover) the restraints control
module will deploy the appropriate safety
devices.
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. A
warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster indicates the readiness of the safety
system. If this warning indicator light is not
functioning and there is another fault within
the system, the message cluster may display
an airbag failure warning. See Information
Displays (page 109). You will hear five tones
that repeat periodically until you repair the
problem, the warning indicator light or both.
Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
•The readiness light will not illuminate
immediately after the ignition is turned
on.
•The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
•A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag
supplemental restraint system is designed
to activate when your vehicle sustains frontal
or sideways deceleration sufficient to cause
the restraints control module to deploy a
safety device or when a certain likelihood of
a rollover event is detected by the rollover
sensor.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or
airbags did not activate for both front seat
occupants in a crash does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather,
it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (for
example, crash severity, belt usage) were
not appropriate to activate these safety
devices.
•The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
•The safety belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal, side and rollover crashes.
•The design of the side airbags is to inflate
in certain side crashes. Side airbags may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation.
50
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
•The knee airbag(s) may deploy based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
•The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes and
when a certain likelihood of rollover is
detected by the rollover sensor. The
Safety Canopy may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation, or a certain likelihood of
rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
51
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of the
following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
•weather conditions
•nearby radio towers
•structures around the vehicle
•other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle
Other short-distance radio transmitters, such
as amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems may operate on the same
frequency as your remote control. If other
transmitters are operating on those
frequencies, you may not be able to use your
remote control. Using your remote control
near some types of electronic equipment,
such as USB devices, computers or cell
phones can interfere with remote operation.
Operating your remote control near metal or
metallic-finished purses, bags or clothing can
interfere with remote operation. You can lock
and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize
your vehicle to unlock when one of the
following conditions are met:
•You touch the inside of any exterior door
handle within 3 ft (1 m) proximity of an
intelligent access key.
•You press the luggage compartment
button.
•You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is
present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to mechanically
unlock your door. You can use the
mechanical key blade in your intelligent
access key to open the driver door in this
situation. See Remote Control (page 53).
52
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Information Provided by:
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
E144506
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to activate
the push-button start system.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade that you
can use to unlock the driver door.
E208898
Slide the release on the back of the remote
control and pivot the cover off to access the
key blade.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle’s backup keys came with
a security tag that provides important vehicle
key cut information. Keep the tag in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete
the transmitter programming to your vehicle.
The transmitter should operate normally
after you replace the battery.
A message will appear in the information
display when the remote control battery is
low. See General Information (page 109).
Intelligent Access Transmitter
The remote control uses two coin-type
three-volt lithium batteries CR2025 or
equivalent.
53
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Information Provided by:
E176225
1. Slide the release on the back of the
remote control and pivot the cover off.
E153890
2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist to
separate the housing.
E176226
3. Remove the batteries.
4. Install new batteries with the + facing
each other.
Note: Make sure to replace the label
between the two batteries.
5. Reinstall the housing and cover.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within three
seconds. The horn will sound and
the turn signals will flash. We
recommend you use this method to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic
alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm will only operate
when the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to deactivate.
Remote Start
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle
is low on fuel.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle
from outside the vehicle. The transmitter has
an extended operating range.
54
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Information Provided by:
Vehicles with automatic climate control can
be configured to operate when the vehicle
is remote started. See Automatic Climate
Control (page 133).
Many states and provinces have restrictions
for the use of remote start. Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding remote start
systems.
The remote start system will not work if:
•The ignition is on.
•The alarm system is triggered.
•You switch off the feature in the
information display. See General
Information (page 109).
•The hood is open.
•The transmission is not in P.
•The vehicle battery voltage is too low.
•The service engine soon light is on.
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. Your vehicle
will not remote start if you do not follow this
sequence.
E138626
The tag with your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The
exterior lamps will flash twice.
The horn will sound if the system fails to start.
See General Information (page 109).
The power windows will not work during the
remote start and the radio will not turn on
automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and the
vehicle will run for 5, 10, or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting. See General
Information (page 109).
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If
you programmed the duration to last 10
minutes, the second 10 minutes will begin
after what is left of the first activation time.
For example, if your vehicle had been
running from the first remote start for 5
minutes, your vehicle continues to run now
for a total of 20 minutes. You can extend the
remote start up to a maximum of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after a vehicle shutdown.
55
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Information Provided by:
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The parking
lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to your
vehicle to remotely switch off your vehicle
after remote starting. This is due to the
added noise of your running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start
system through the information display. See
General Information (page 109).
Remote Control Feedback
An LED on the remote control provides status
feedback of remote start or stop commands.
StatusLED
Remote start or
extension successful
Solid green
Remote stop
successful; engine
off
Solid red
Remote start or stop
failed
Blinking red
Waiting for status
update from vehicle
Blinking green
Memory Feature
You can program your intelligent access key
to recall memory positions. See Memory
Function (page 144).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 77).
To re-program the passive anti-theft system
see an authorized dealer.
56
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Information Provided by:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys can be
activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that remain unprogrammed are
referred to as administrator keys or admin
keys. They can be used to:
•Create a MyKey.
•Program configurable MyKey settings.
•Clear all MyKey features.
When you have created a MyKey, you can
access the following information by using
the information display to determine:
•How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
•The total distance your vehicle traveled
with a MyKey.
Note: Switch the vehicle on to use the
system.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with
push-button start, when both a MyKey and
an admin remote transmitter are present,
the admin remote transmitter will be
recognized by the vehicle while switching
the vehicle on to start the vehicle.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
•Safety belt reminder. You cannot disable
this feature. The audio system will mute
when the front seat passengers’ safety
belts are not fastened.
•Early low fuel or charge. The low-fuel or
low charge warning activates earlier,
giving the MyKey user more time to refuel
or recharge.
•Driver assist features, if equipped on your
vehicle, are forced on: parking aid and
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) with
cross traffic alert.
•Satellite radio adult content restrictions,
if equipped on your vehicle.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure certain
MyKey settings when you first create a
MyKey and before you recycle the key or
restart the vehicle. You can also change the
settings afterward with an admin key.
•A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit
to a limit that will prevent the driver
from maintaining a safe speed considering
posted speed limits and prevailing road
conditions. The driver is always responsible
to drive in accordance with local laws and
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could
result in accident or injury.
57
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Information Provided by:
•Various vehicle speed minders can be
set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
audible tone when the preselected
vehicle speed is exceeded.
•Audio system maximum volume of 45%.
A message will be shown in the display
when you attempt to exceed the limited
volume. Also, the speed-sensitive or
compensated automatic volume control
will be disabled.
•Always on setting. When this is selected,
you will not be able to switch off
AdvanceTrac™ or traction control, 911
Assist or Emergency Assistance, or the
do not disturb feature (if your vehicle is
equipped with these features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped
with a push-button start, place the remote
control into the backup slot. The location
of your backup slot is in another chapter.
See Starting and Stopping the Engine
(page 158).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the information
display controls. Use the arrow keys to
get to the following menu selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Create MyKey
When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings
for the key(s). See Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings.
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or remote control.
58
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Information Provided by:
2. Access the main menu on the information
display controls. Use the arrow keys to
get to the following menu selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey settings
using the information display control on the
steering wheel. See Information Displays
(page 109).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key or
remote control.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the following message displays.Clear MyKey
59
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Information Provided by:
Action and DescriptionMessage
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status.
60
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Information Provided by:
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 109).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance
is by using an admin key to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected,
then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many
MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine
how many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has
been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
61
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Information Provided by:
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for a
Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
I cannot create a MyKey. •The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key (there always has to be at
least one admin key).
•Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless start transmitter is not placed in the backup position.
See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 159).
•SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode.
•The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 58).
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
•The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 58).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
62
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Information Provided by:
Potential CausesCondition
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 77).I lost a key.
MyKey distances do not accumulate. •The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
•An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys.
•The key system has been reset.
•An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 58).
No MyKey functions with the keyless
entry transmitter.
63
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Information Provided by:
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock or the
remote control to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock is on the driver and
front passenger door panels.
E138628
UnlockA
LockB
Door Lock Indicator
An LED on each door window trim lights
when you lock the door. It remains on for up
to five minutes after you switch the ignition
off.
Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock and interior luggage
compartment release switch will no longer
operate after 20 seconds. You must unlock
your vehicle with the remote control or
keyless keypad, or switch the ignition on, to
restore function to these switches. You can
switch this feature on or off in the information
display. See General Information (page 109).
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any time.
The luggage compartment release button
only works when your vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
E176107
Press the button to unlock the driver door.
Press the button again within three seconds
to unlock all doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
seconds to disable or enable two-stage
unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking
allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one
press of the button. The direction indicators
will flash twice to indicate a change to the
unlocking mode. The unlocking mode
applies to the remote control, keyless entry
keypad and intelligent access.
64
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Information Provided by:
Intelligent access at the driver door will
unlock all doors when you disable two-stage
unlocking.
Locking the Doors
E176108
Press the button to lock all the doors. The
direction indicators will flash.
Press the button again within three seconds
to confirm that all the doors are closed. The
doors lock again, the horn sounds and the
direction indicators flash if all the doors and
the luggage compartment are closed.
Mislock
The horn sounds twice and the lamps will
not flash if:
•Locking is not successful.
•Any door or the liftgate is open.
•The hood is open.
Power Liftgate (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Make sure all persons are clear of the
liftgate area before using the liftgate
control.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you
must drive with the liftgate open, keep the
vents or windows open so outside air comes
into your vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open, close or stop the
movement of a power liftgate. See
Power Liftgate (page 70).
Mechanical Key
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to lock
and unlock your vehicle. See Remote
Control (page 53).
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle once to lock all doors.
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
your vehicle once to unlock the driver door
only.
Locking the Doors Individually
If the power locks fail to operate, lock the
doors individually using the key in the
position shown.
65
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Information Provided by:
E180643
Left-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock.
Opening a Rear Door from Inside
Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock
and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks
the door and the second pull will unlatch the
door.
Activating Intelligent Access
The intelligent access key must be within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle.
Locking the Doors
E146044
The locking sensors are on the front and rear
door handles.
Press and hold the lock sensor area for about
a second to lock your vehicle. To avoid
unlocking the door inadvertently, make sure
you only touch the lock sensor and not other
areas of the door handle.
After locking the doors with the lock sensor,
there is a brief delay before you can unlock
your vehicle. This delay lets you pull the
handle to make sure it locked.
Note: Keep the door handle surface clean
to avoid issues with operation.
Unlocking the Doors
Pull an exterior door handle to unlock and
open the door. The unlock sensor is on the
back of the handle. Make sure not to touch
the lock sensor area on the front of the
handle.
At the Liftgate
Press the exterior liftgate release button
inside the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
66
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Information Provided by:
Smart Unlocks
This feature helps to prevent you from
unintentionally locking your intelligent access
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you lock your vehicle with the door
open and the ignition off, your vehicle will
search for an intelligent access key in the
passenger compartment after you close the
door. If your vehicle finds a key, all of the
doors will immediately unlock.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle. To do this, lock your
vehicle after you have closed all the doors
by:
•Using the keyless entry keypad.
•Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
•Touching the locking area on the handle
with another intelligent access key in
your hand.
When you open one of the front doors with
the ignition on, and lock your vehicle using
the power door lock, all doors will lock then
unlock.
Autolock Feature
The autolock feature will lock all the doors
when all of the following occur:
•All doors are closed.
•The ignition is on.
•You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
•Your vehicle attains a speed greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when both of
the following occur:
•You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
less than 9 mph (15 km/h).
•Your vehicle then attains a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Enabling or Disabling
To enable or disable the autolock feature,
contact an authorized dealer.
Autounlock Feature
The autounlock feature unlocks all the doors
when all of the following occur:
•The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 4 mph
(7 km/h).
•Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to accessory.
•You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or to
accessory.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling
You can enable or disable the autounlock
feature in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 109).
67
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Information Provided by:
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior lamps
will light when you unlock the doors with the
remote control.
The system turns off the lights if:
•You start your vehicle.
•You press the remote control lock button.
•They are on for 25 seconds.
The lights will not turn off if:
•You switch them on with the lamp
control.
•Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and select exterior lamps
will light when all doors are closed and you
switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and either of the following occurs:
•After 25 seconds elapse.
•You lock your vehicle from the outside.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps or dome
lamps on and switch the ignition off, this
feature turns them off after some time.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave your vehicle with the ignition on,
it will turn off 15 minutes after you close all
of the doors.
Welcome Lighting
This feature lights select exterior lighting as
you approach your vehicle. You must have
an intelligent access key with you. The
feature turns off when you open a door,
liftgate, or unlock your vehicle. Welcome
lighting remains on for 25 seconds or until
you start your vehicle.
The feature is active when:
•The feature is configured on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 109).
•The ignition is off.
•All doors and the liftgate are closed.
•You lock your vehicle.
The feature is not active when:
•Your vehicle detects the intelligent
access key is inside.
•The intelligent access key is in close
range of the vehicle for more than two
minutes.
•The anti-theft alarm triggers.
•You do not start your vehicle for more
than five days.
•The vehicle battery charge is low.
Note: When this feature is disabled, you
must switch the ignition on to reset it.
Note: This feature may not correctly operate
if the intelligent access key is stored within
8–15 ft (2.4–4.6 m) of your vehicle while not
in use.
68
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Information Provided by:
MANUAL LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety
belt properly. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you
must drive with the liftgate open, keep the
vents or windows open so outside air comes
into your vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Opening the Liftgate
Manually
E180684
69
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Information Provided by:
Press the button to unlatch the liftgate. Once
unlatched, pull on the outside handle to open
the liftgate.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within three
seconds. Pull on the outside
handle to open.
Closing the Liftgate
E155976
A handle is located inside the liftgate to help
with closing.
POWER LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Make sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using
a safety belt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you
must drive with the liftgate open, keep the
vents or windows open so outside air comes
into your vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
WARNINGS
Keep keys out of reach of children. Do
not allow children to operate or play
near an open or moving power liftgate. You
should supervise the operation of the power
liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
70
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Information Provided by:
Three warning tones sound as the liftgate
begins to power close. One short chime
indicates a problem with the open or close
request, caused by:
•The ignition is on and the transmission
is not in park (P).
•The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
•The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has fully
opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a possible
gas strut failure. A repetitive chime sounds
and the liftgate closes under control. Remove
any excessive weight from the liftgate. If the
liftgate continues to close after opening,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
From the Instrument Panel
E138633
Press the button on the instrument
panel.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
With the Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control. If
an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
E138632
2. Press the button in the top of the liftgate
pull-cup handle.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction. Manually
interfering with the liftgate motion may also
replicate a gas strut failure.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Keep clear of the liftgate when
activating the rear switch.
71
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Information Provided by:
E138636
Press and release the liftgate control button.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
You can stop the liftgate movement by doing
any of the following:
•Pressing the liftgate control button.
•Pressing the liftgate button on the remote
control twice.
•Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
•Activating the obstacle detection feature.
•Moving your foot under and away from
the center rear bumper in a single-kick
motion.*
*This method only works for vehicles with the
hands-free liftgate feature.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing
the control button on the liftgate when it
reaches the desired height.
Note: Once the liftgate has stopped moving,
you can also manually move it to the desired
height.
3. Press and hold the liftgate control button
on the liftgate until you hear a chime,
indicating programming is complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the power
liftgate, you can manually move it to a
different height.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height, even if you disconnect
the battery.
When operating the power liftgate after you
have programmed a lower height than fully
open, you can fully open the liftgate by
manually pushing it upward to the maximum
open position.
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Three tones sound and the system
reverses to open. Once you remove the
obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle while the liftgate
is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce
and activate obstacle detection. To prevent
this, let the power liftgate close completely
before you enter your vehicle. Before driving
off, check the instrument cluster for a liftgate
or door ajar message or warning indicator.
Failure to do this could result in
unintentionally leaving the liftgate open
while driving.
72
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Information Provided by:
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and three tones sound. Once you
remove the obstacle, you can continue to
operate the liftgate.
Hands-Free Feature
Make sure you have an intelligent access
transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.
E171686
2
1
1. Move your foot under and away from the
rear bumper detection area in a
single-kick motion. Do not move your foot
sideways or the sensors may not detect
the motion. For vehicles with both the
hands-free liftgate and trailer tow, move
your foot under the bumper between the
trailer hitch and the exhaust.
2. The liftgate powers open or close.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction. Manually
interfering with the liftgate motion may also
replicate a gas strut failure.
Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
intelligent access key away from the rear
bumper detection area when washing your
vehicle.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver
window. It is invisible until touched and then
it lights up so you can see and touch the
appropriate buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
73
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Information Provided by:
E138637
You can use the keypad to do the following:
•Lock or unlock the doors.
•Recall memory seat and mirror positions.
•Program and erase user codes.
•Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code is
located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also create up to five of your
own five-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1•2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1•2 on the keypad to save personal
code 1.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry codes,
repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
•Press 3•4 to save personal code 2.
•Press 5•6 to save personal code 3.
•Press 7•8 to save personal code 4.
•Press 9•0 to save personal code 5.
Tips:
•Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
•Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
•The factory-set code will work even if you
have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions
The programmed entry codes will recall
driver memory positions as follows:
•Entry code 1 will recall driver 1 memory
positions.
•Entry code 2 will recall driver 2 memory
positions.
•Entry code 3 will recall driver 3 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will not
recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
74
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Information Provided by:
2. Press and release 1•2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1•2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing Step 2.
All personal codes will erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times (35
consecutive button presses). This mode
disables the keypad for one minute and the
keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature turns off after any of
the following occur:
•One minute of keypad inactivity passes.
•You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
•You switch the ignition on.
•You unlock the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each number
within five seconds of each other. The
interior lamps will illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is disabled. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 64).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3•4 control within five
seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7•8 and 9•0 at the same time
with the driver door closed. You do not need
to enter the keypad code first.
Displaying the Factory-Set Code
Note: You will need to have two
programmed intelligent access keys for this
procedure.
To display the factory-set code in the
information display:
E170454
1. Open the center console lid.
2. Insert the first programmed key in the
backup slot.
3. Press the push button ignition switch
once and wait a few seconds.
4. Press the push button ignition switch
again and remove the key.
5. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in the
backup slot and press the push button
ignition switch.
75
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Information Provided by:
The factory-set code will appear in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
76
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Information Provided by:
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or
a second coded key on the same key chain
may cause vehicle starting problems if they
are too close to the key when starting the
engine. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine.
Switch the ignition off, move all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and
restart the engine if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock™
The system is an engine immobilization
system. The intended design is to help
prevent the engine from starting unless a
coded key programmed to your vehicle is
used. Using the wrong key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may appear
in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in the
information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
If you switch the ignition on with a coded key
you disarm the vehicle. If you unlock the
doors with the touch handle you disarm the
alarm.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two
intelligent access keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent access
with push button start system, as well as a
remote control.
If your programmed transmitters are lost or
stolen and you do not have an extra coded
key, you will need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. You need to
erase the key codes from your vehicle and
program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key
See your authorized dealer to have
additional keys programmed to your vehicle.
77
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Security
Information Provided by:
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an unauthorized
entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if
any door, the luggage compartment or the
hood is opened without using the key,
remote control or keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm problem
with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not
a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock your
vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
•Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
•Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
•Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
78
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Security
Information Provided by:
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel when
your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 139).
1
2
2
E95178
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
3
E95179
3. Lock the steering column.
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel when
your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 139).
E161834
79
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Information Provided by:
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
•Tilt: press the top or bottom of the
control.
•Telescope: press the front or rear of the
control.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering column
position with the memory function. See
Memory Function (page 144).
Pressing the adjustment control during
memory recall cancels the operation. The
column responds to the adjustment control.
The steering column sets a stopping position
just short of the end of the column position
to prevent damage to the steering column.
A new stopping position sets if the steering
column encounters an object when tilting or
telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Press the steering column control again
after encountering the new stopping
position.
2. Continue pressing the control until it
reaches the end of the column position.
A new stopping position is set. The next time
you tilt or telescope the steering column, it
will stop just short of the end of the column
position.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the steering
column will move to the full up position to
allow extra room to exit your vehicle. The
column will return to the previous setting
when you switch the ignition on. You can
enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 109).
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions with
the control:
E145979
Volume up.A
Volume down.B
Seek up or next.C
Seek down or previous.D
Mute.E
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
•Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
•Play the next or the previous track.
80
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Information Provided by:
Press and hold the seek button to:
•Tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band.
•Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL
E145980
Voice recognition.A
End call.B
Answer call.C
See SYNC supplement.
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
E145976
Type 2
E145977
See Cruise Control (page 203).
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
E145981
See Information Displays (page 109).
81
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Information Provided by:
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If Equipped)
See SYNC supplement.
82
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Information Provided by:
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the wipers
before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If
that does not resolve the issue, install new
wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the windshield
washers before wiping a dry windshield.
DCB
E169313
A
Single wipeA
Intermittent wipeB
Normal wipeC
High speed wipeD
Intermittent Wipe
C
B
A
E169314
Shortest wipe intervalA
Intermittent wipeB
Longest wipe intervalC
Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
Speed dependent wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes will decrease.
83
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Information Provided by:
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the
windshield wipers before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If
that does not resolve the issue, install new
wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, your low beam
headlamps will illuminate automatically when
the rain sensor activates the windshield
wipers continuously.
Note: Wet or winter driving conditions with
ice, snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
In these conditions, you can do the following
to help keep your windshield clear:
•Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
•Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
•Switch the autowipers off.
A
C
B
E169315
Highest sensitivityA
OnB
Lowest sensitivityC
The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor.
You will find it in the area around the interior
mirror. The rain sensor monitors the amount
of moisture on the windshield and
automatically turns on the wipers. It will
adjust the wiper speed by the amount of
moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield.
Note: This autowiper feature is automatically
set to on and remains on until you switch it
off in the information display. You can also
switch the feature back on at any time. See
Autowipers (page 84).
Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor. Set the control to low
sensitivity, and the wipers will turn on when
the rain sensor detects a large amount of
moisture on the windshield. Set the control
to high sensitivity, and the wipers will turn
on when the rain sensor detects a small
amount of moisture on the windshield.
84
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Information Provided by:
Note: When you set the wiper system to
intermittent wipe and the autowiper system
is on, the autowiper sensitivity setting adjusts
the wiper speed according to the moisture
on the windshield only. Use the wiper lever
to wipe the windshield on-demand.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area
around the mirror is dirty, then the wipers
may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This may cause
the washer pump to overheat.
E169316
To operate the washers and spray the
windshield, pull the lever toward you.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing to clear any remaining washer fluid.
This feature can be switched on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 109).
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
E168043
Intermittent wipeA
Low-speed wipeB
OffC
85
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Information Provided by:
Press the top of the button at the end of the
lever to switch on the intermittent wiper.
Press the button again to switch on
low-speed wipe. Press the bottom of the
button to switch the wiper off, or to change
the wiper speed from low-speed to
intermittent.
When you shift into R (Reverse), the rear
wiper will turn on to intermittent if the front
wiper sensor activates the front wipers.
Rear Window Washer
E168044
To operate the rear washer and spray the
rear window, push the lever away from you.
When you release the lever, the wiper will
operate for a short time.
86
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate
normal changes in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is a
possibility that condensation can occur when
the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on
the interior of the lens. The fine mist
eventually clears and exits through the vents
during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
•The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
•A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation are:
•A water puddle inside the lamp.
•Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
OffA
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps
B
HeadlampsC
87
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Information Provided by:
High Beams
E162679
Push the lever forward to switch the high
beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the lever
toward you to switch the high beams off.
Headlamp Flasher
E162680
Pull the lever toward you slightly and release
it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the tail lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting during
low visibility driving conditions. Also, the
autolamps switch position may not activate
the headlamps in all low visibility conditions,
such as daytime fog. Always ensure that your
headlamps are switched to auto or on, as
appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
collision.
E142451
88
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Information Provided by:
When the lighting control is in the autolamps
position, the headlamps will automatically
turn on in low light situations or when wipers
activate.
If equipped, the following also activate when
the lighting control is in the autolamps
position and you switch them on in the
information display:
•Configurable daytime running lamps.
•Automatic high beam control.
•Adaptive headlamp control.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use the
information display controls to adjust the
period of time that the headlamps remain
on. See Information Displays (page 109).
Note: With the headlamps in the autolamps
position, you cannot switch the high beam
headlamps on until the autolamps system
turns the headlamps on.
Note: If the lighting control switch is in the
autolamps position and the headlamps are
off, the parking lamps will light as signature
lighting. If the headlamps are on, or the
lighting control switch is in the parking lamps
position, the parking lamps will not light as
signature lighting.
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control switch is in the autolamps position.
They will turn off approximately 60 seconds
after you switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper
activation:
•During a mist wipe.
•When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
•If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you have autolamps and autowipers
switched on, the low beam headlamps will
turn on automatically when the windshield
wipers operate continuously.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
becomes discharged, the illuminated
components will switch to the maximum
setting.
A B
E165366
Press repeatedly or press and hold
to dim.
A
Press repeatedly or press and hold
to brighten.
B
89
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Information Provided by:
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You will
hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch
off automatically after three minutes with any
door open or 30 seconds after the last door
has been closed. You can cancel this feature
by pulling the direction indicator toward you
again or switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting during
low visibility driving conditions. Also, the
autolamps switch position may not activate
the headlamps in all low visibility conditions,
such as daytime fog. Make sure the
headlamps are switched to auto or on, as
appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
Type 1 - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
the parking brake is released for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type 2 - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or off
using the information display controls. See
Information Displays (page 109).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. They are switched on in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
109).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
the parking brake is released for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps,
and you can use them to temporarily override
autolamp control.
90
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Information Provided by:
When switched off in the information display,
the daytime running lamps are off in all
lighting control switch positions.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
The system automatically turns on the high
beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic
is present. When it detects the headlights of
an approaching vehicle, the rear lamps of
the preceding vehicle or street lighting, the
system turns off the high beams before they
distract other drivers. The low beams remain
on.
Note: If it appears that automatic high beam
is not functioning properly, check the
windshield in front of the camera for a
blockage. A clear view of the road is
required for proper system operation. Make
sure that authorized personnel repair any
windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view.
Note: If the system detects a blockage such
as bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice,
and you do not observe changes, the system
may go into low beam mode until you clear
the blockage. A message may also appear
in the information display noting the front
camera is blocked.
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water spots
do not affect the performance of the
automatic high beam control. However, in
cold or inclement weather conditions, you
may notice a decrease in the availability of
the automatic high beam control, especially
at start up. If you want to change the beam
state independently of the system, you may
switch the high beams on or off using the
lighting control switch. Automatic high beam
control resumes when conditions are correct.
Note: Modification of your vehicle ride height
such as using much larger tires, may
degrade feature performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind
the windshield of your vehicle, continuously
monitors conditions to decide when to switch
the high beams off and on.
Once the system is active, the high beams
switch on if:
•The ambient light level is low enough.
•There is no traffic in front of the vehicle.
•The vehicle speed is greater than 31 mph
(50 km/h).
The high beams switch off if:
•The system detects the headlamps of an
approaching vehicle or the rear lamps of
a preceding vehicle.
•Vehicle speed falls below 26 mph
(42 km/h).
•The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
•The system detects severe rain, snow or
fog.
•The camera is blocked.
Activating the System
Switch on the system in the information
display and switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position. See Information
Displays (page 109). See Autolamps (page
88).
91
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Information Provided by:
E142451
The indicator lamp illuminates to confirm
when the system is ready to assist.
Manually Overriding the System
E169254
When automatic high beam control has
activated the high beams, pushing or pulling
the stalk provides a temporary override to
low beam.
Use the information display menu to
permanently deactivate the system, or switch
the lighting control from autolamps to
headlamps.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E170427
Push the lever up or down to use the
direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
WELCOME LIGHTING
The Lincoln welcome mat projection lights
are on the bottom of the exterior mirror
housings. They will project an image onto
the ground a short distance from your vehicle
when welcome lighting or lighted entry turns
on.
For auto-fold mirrors, the Lincoln welcome
mat will turn on when welcome lighting or
lighted entry turns on and the mirrors have
been automatically folded in upon locking
or using the switch on the door.
Note: Moisture, frost and ice build-up or
other types of contamination on the surface
of the light lens can cause non-permanent
distortion or reduced brightness of the
image. Do not use abrasive materials to
clean the lens.
92
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Information Provided by:
Note: If you enable auto-fold and then you
fold the mirrors in manually to the door
window glass, then the welcome mats will
not turn on.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The interior lamps turn on when:
•You open any door.
•You press a remote control button.
•You press switch A on the front interior
lamp.
Front Interior Lamp
Note: Touch switch C to switch the door
function off when you open any door. The
indicator lamp will illuminate amber when
the door function is off. When the door
function is off and you open a door, the
courtesy and door lamps will stay off. Touch
switch C again to switch the door function
back on. The indicator lamp will illuminate
blue when the door function is on. When the
door function is on and you open a door, the
courtesy and door lamps will switch on.
E176210
A. Left-hand side map lamp switch.
B. All lamps on switch.
C. Door function switch.
D. Right-hand side map lamp switch.
Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped)
A
E170429
The rear interior lamps are located in the
headliner by the grab handles.
•You can switch individual rear lamps on
independently by pressing the switch (A).
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
The ambient lighting system is adjusted with
the touchscreen.
See SYNC supplement.
93
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Information Provided by:
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may seriously
injure themselves.
When closing the power windows, you
should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window
openings.
E146043
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there is
an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse if
it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal injury
or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within a
few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window closes fully.
94
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Information Provided by:
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It will illuminate when you
lock the rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several
minutes after you switch the ignition off or
until you open either front door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING
You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can switch this feature on and off
in the information display or contact an
authorized dealer. See General Information
(page 109).
Note: To operate this feature, make sure the
accessory delay is not switched on.
Opening the Windows
You can open the windows only for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your vehicle,
press and hold the remote control unlock
button to open the windows. Release the
button once movement starts. Press the lock
or unlock button to stop movement.
Closing the Windows
WARNING
When closing the windows, you should
verify they are free of obstructions and
make sure that children and pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
To close the windows, press and hold the
remote control lock button. Release the
button once movement starts. Press the lock
or unlock button to stop movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
95
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Information Provided by:
E144073
Left-hand mirror.A
Adjustment control.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The
control will light.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Auto-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
The exterior mirrors fold in toward the glass
automatically when you place the
transmission into park (P), open a front door
and then lock your vehicle by using either
the lock button on the door or with the lock
button on your remote transmitter.
Auto-folding mirrors unfold and return to their
original position automatically after you
unlock your vehicle, and then open and close
the driver's door.
You can switch this feature on and off
through the information display. See General
Information (page 109).
E170431
You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the door lock control located on the
door. The control will light and the mirrors
will fold in toward the glass. Press the control
again to unfold the mirrors. The control light
will turn off.
Note: If you use the control to fold the
mirrors on demand and the auto fold feature
is switched on, you must use the control
again to unfold them.
96
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Information Provided by:
Loose Mirror
You can manually fold an auto-folding mirror
by pulling it toward the door window glass.
This may cause the mirror to appear loose
and it will need to be re-synchronized. Press
the control to fold the mirrors in until the
movement stops. You will hear a click that
indicates re-synchronization. If you do not
hear a click, use the control again to fold the
mirrors all the way out, and then in again.
Once you hear the click, the mirrors will
operate normally until you fold them
manually again.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
136).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Memory
Function (page 144).
Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver’s exterior mirror automatically
dims when the interior auto-dimming mirror
turns on.
Lincoln Welcome Mat
Projection lights, on the bottom of the mirror
housings, project an image onto the ground
a short distance from the vehicle. See
Lighting (page 87).
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
The blind spot mirror has a wide-angle mirror
inside the exterior mirror that can increase
visibility along the side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror. If
no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is
at a safe distance, signal that you intend to
change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to
verify traffic is clear and carefully change
lanes.
97
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Information Provided by:
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the main
mirror when it is at a distance. The image
becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image will
transition from the main mirror and begin to
appear in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle
approaches (B). The vehicle will transition to
your peripheral field of view as it leaves the
blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System (page
219).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a second
pivot point. This lets you move the mirror
head up or down and from side to side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger
or raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
98
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Information Provided by:
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side window
and extend it rearward for extra shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended in
the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
WARNINGS
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the roof
opening.
The moonroof and sunscreen controls are
on the overhead console and have a
one-touch open and close feature. To stop
the motion during a one-touch operation,
touch the control a second time.
99
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Information Provided by:
E144499
OpenA
VentB
CloseC
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Touch (A) to open the moonroof. It will stop
short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Touch (A) again to
fully open the moonroof.
Touch (C) to close the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically and
reverse some distance if an obstacle is
detected while closing.
Touch and hold (C) within two seconds of a
bounce-back event to override this function.
Venting the Moonroof
Touch (B) to vent the moonroof.
Touch (C) to close it.
Power Sunscreen
E145985
CloseA
OpenB
Touch the associated control to operate the
sunscreen.
Press and release the rear of the control to
open the moonroof. If the sunscreen is
closed, it will automatically open before the
moonroof opens. The moonroof will stop
short of the fully opened position.
100
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Information Provided by:
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and hold the
control again to fully open the moonroof.
Press and release the front of the control to
close the moonroof.
The sunscreen must be open before opening
the moonroof. If you touch the moonroof
open control while the sunscreen is in its
closed position, the sunscreen will open first
followed by the moonroof. If both the
sunscreen and moonroof are open and you
touch the moonroof close control, the
moonroof will close first followed by the
sunscreen.
101
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Information Provided by:
GAUGES
E170368
102
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Information Provided by:
TachometerA
Information displayB
SpeedometerC
Fuel gaugeD
Engine coolant temperature gaugeE
Information Display
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 109).
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when
your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the
fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of
your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
The needle should move toward F when you
refuel your vehicle. If the needle points to E
after adding fuel, this indicates your vehicle
needs service soon.
After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:
•It may take a short time for the needle to
reach full after leaving the gas station.
This is normal and depends upon the
slope of pavement at the gas station.
•The fuel amount dispensed into the tank
is a little less or more than the gauge
indicated. This is normal and depends
upon the slope of pavement at the gas
station.
•If the gas station nozzle shuts off before
the tank is full, try a different gas pump
nozzle.
•There is a small reserve left in the tank
when the fuel gauge reaches empty.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers when the
distance to empty reaches 50 miles (80 km),
25 miles (40 km) and 10 miles (16 km) to
empty.
Variations:
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
103
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Information Provided by:
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and let
the engine cool.
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators
will alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure
they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective
system warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp, but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system indicator
light changes color to indicate
what mode the system is in: See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 204).
On (white light): Illuminates when you turn
the adaptive cruise control system on. Turns
off when you turn the speed control system
off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system engages.
Turns off when the speed control system is
disengaged.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to
have normal braking (without Anti-lock
braking system) unless the brake system
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch off
all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked by
an authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
E151262
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature off or in conjunction
with a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 219).
104
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Information Provided by:
Brake System
E144522
It will illuminate when you engage
the parking brake with the ignition
on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that you do not have the parking brake
engaged. If you do not have the parking
brake engaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system malfunction. Have
the system checked immediately by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance may occur.
It will take you longer to stop your vehicle.
Have your vehicle checked by your
authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the risk
of personal injury.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you turn the left
or right direction indicator or the
hazard warning flasher on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a
burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 299).
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Electric Park Brake
E146190
It will illuminate or flash when the
electric parking brake has a
malfunction. See Electric Parking
Brake (page 184).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible,
switch off the engine and let cool. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 289).
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch the engine off. Check the engine
oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 288).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Safety Belt
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt. See Safety Belt
Minder (page 36).
105
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Information Provided by:
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates a
malfunction. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights will illuminate
on the windshield in certain
instances when using adaptive
cruise control or the collision warning system.
It will also illuminate momentarily when you
start your vehicle to make sure the display
works.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hood Ajar
E159324
Displays when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp remains
on with the engine running or
when driving, check your tire pressure as
soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when the system has
detected a powertrain or an
all-wheel drive fault. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
106
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Information Provided by:
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon indicator
light stays illuminated after you
start the engine, it indicates that
the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has
detected a malfunction of your vehicle
emissions control system. Refer to On board
diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling
chapter for more information about having
your vehicle serviced. See Emission Control
System (page 169).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your catalytic
converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and
have your vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other
vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Have an authorized dealer service your
vehicle immediately.
When you first switch the ignition on, before
engine start, the service engine soon
indicator light illuminates to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is ready
for inspection maintenance testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light will
stay on until you crank the engine, and then
turn itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the service
engine soon light blinks eight times, it means
that your vehicle is not ready for inspection
maintenance testing. See Emission Control
System (page 169).
Stability Control
E138639
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated or
does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction, the system
will switch off. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. See
Using Stability Control (page 191).
Stability Control Off
It will illuminate when you switch
the system off. It will go out when
you switch the system back on or
when you switch the ignition off. See Using
Stability Control (page 191).
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Keyless Warning Alert
The horn will sound twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key and
your vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle
is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
107
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Information Provided by:
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake
on and drive your vehicle. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
the parking brake, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
108
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display controls
on the steering wheel. The information
display provides the corresponding
information.
Information Display Controls
E170369
•Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through and highlight the options
within a menu.
•Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
•Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
•Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
•Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side of
the information display, you can choose from
the following categories:
E138660
Trip 1 & 2
E144640
Fuel Economy
E144639
Driver Assist
E100023
Settings
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back to
the main menu.
109
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Trip 1 & 2
E138660
Choose between the standard or
enhanced trip display.
Trip 1 & 2
Normal or TowingDistance to E
Average fuel economy
Trip timer
Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.
•Trip odometer — shows the accumulated trip distance.
•Trip Timer— when you switch your vehicle off the timer stops and then restarts when you restart your vehicle.
•Average fuel economy — shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Fuel Economy
E144640
Use the left or right arrow buttons
to choose the desired fuel
economy display.
Fuel Economy
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
•Instantaneous Fuel Economy: This display shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy.
110
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Driver Assist
E144639
Use the up or down arrow buttons
to choose between the following
display options.
Driver Assist
Traction Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Blindspot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
High, Normal or LowSensitivityCollision Warn
Cross Traffic - check enabled or uncheck disabled
—Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
—On or DisplayDriver Alert
Intelligent AWD - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Alert, Aid or Alert + AidModeLane keeping Sys
High, Normal or LowIntensity
Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
111
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Settings
E100023
In this mode, you can configure
different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
Note: Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
Settings
Comfort, Normal or SportHandling in DDrive ControlVehicle
Normal or SportHandling in S
Normal or SportPerformance in S
Normal or TowingDTE Calculation
Easy Entry / Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabled
On or OffAuto HighbeamLighting
Select time intervalAutolamp Delay
On or OffDaytime Lights
Welcome Lighting - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabledLocks
Mislock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
All doors or Driver doorRemote Unlocking
112
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Settings
Switches Inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autofold - check enabled or uncheck disabledMirror
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life
Power Liftgate - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Auto or Last SettingsClimate ControlRemote Start
Auto Heated or OffFront and Wheel
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Remote - check enabled or uncheck disabledWindows
Courtesy Wipe - check enabled or uncheck disabledWipers
Rain Sensing - check enabled or uncheck disabled
—Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey
—Always On or User Select-
able
911 Assist
—Always On or User Select-
able
Traction Control
—Choose desired speed or offMax Speed
113
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Settings
—Choose desired speed or offSpeed Minder
—Always On or User Select-
able
Volume Limiter
—Always On or User Select-
able
Do Not Disturb
—Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
—Choose your applicable
setting
Distance UnitDisplay
—Choose your applicable
setting
Temperature Unit
—Choose your applicable
setting
Language
Speedo in km/h - check enabled or uncheck disabled
114
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available. The
information display may abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.
E145981
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the information
display. The information display will
automatically remove other messages after
a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
ActionMessage
The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Active Park Fault
115
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control from engaging. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 204).
Adaptive Cruise Malfunction
A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 204).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor.
You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 204).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
The system has disabled the automatic braking.Normal Cruise Active Automatic Braking
Turned Off
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control from engaging.Front Sensor Not Aligned
The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control
The vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.Adaptive Cruise Speed Too Low to
Activate
The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap distance and the driver needs to shift the
transmission into a lower gear.
Adaptive Cruise Shift Down
116
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
AdvanceTrac™
ActionMessage
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Service AdvanceTrac
The driver has disabled or enabled the traction control.AdvanceTrac Off On
Airbag
ActionMessage
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor. Remove blockage.Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger Seat
Alarm
ActionMessage
Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 78).Vehicle Alarm to Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle
117
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
The engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off in XX Seconds
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off for Fuel Economy
The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to
override the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in XX Seconds Press Ok
to Override
All-Wheel Drive
ActionMessage
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself from overheating.AWD Temporarily Disabled
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself from overheating or if you are
using the temporary spare tire.
AWD Off
The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a
short distance with the road tire re-installed or after the system cools.
AWD Restored
The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AWD Malfunction Service Required
118
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system detects an extended low-voltage condition. Your vehicle will
disable various features to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical loads as
soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled
features will operate again as normal.
Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned
Off
The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn
your ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once you
restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary
electrical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off to Save Battery
119
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 219).Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 219).Cross Traffic Vehicle Coming From X
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 219).
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Cross Traffic System Fault
Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Collision Warning Malfunction
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor.
You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Collision Warning System (page 226).
Collision Warning Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Collision Warning Not Available
120
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door(s) listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
The luggage compartment is not completely closed.Luggage compartment door ajar
The hood is not completely closed.Hood Ajar
The system has disabled the door switches.Switches Inhibited Security Mode
There is a system malfunction with the child locks. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Child Lock Malfunction Service Required
The factory keypad code displays in the information display after system resets the keypad.
See Keyless Entry (page 73).
Factory Keypad Code XXXXX
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest Now
Take a rest break soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested
121
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page 186).Hill Start Assist Not Available
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.Press Brake to START
The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless Starting (page 158).No Key Detected
You pressed the start/stop button to switch off the engine and your vehicle does not detect your
intelligent access key inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is Needed
Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.Run Power Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See an authorized dealer for service.Starting System Fault
122
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
ActionMessage
You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key to the system.Key Program Successful
You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the system.Key Program Failure
You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the system.Max Number of Keys Learned
You have not programmed enough keys to the system.Not Enough Keys Learned
The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.Key Battery Low Replace Soon
Inform the driver that they are exiting the vehicle and the engine is on.Engine On
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable.Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires you to clean the windshield in order for it to
operate properly.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Front Camera Malfunction Service
Required
The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel.Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
123
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
LOW Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil Check (page 288).Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left is at 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 288).Oil Change Required
The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake system immediately. See Brake Fluid Check
(page 293).
Brake Fluid Level LOW
The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Check Brake System
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Overtemperature
The washer fluid is low, refill washer fluid.Washer Fluid Level Low
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine temperature.Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp
Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate
properly. See an authorized dealer.
Transport / Factory Mode
The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
124
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
MyKey
ActionMessage
You cannot program a MyKey.MyKey Not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive Safely
When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays that the MyKey speed limit is on.Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h
MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph
(130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey Setting
You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.Check Speed Drive Safely
Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On - MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On - MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannot be Deactivated
With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.Lane Keeping Alert On MyKey Setting
125
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See
Rear Parking Aid (page 193).
Check Front Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See
Rear Parking Aid (page 193).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Park Brake
ActionMessage
You have set the parking brake and you have driven the vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If
the warning stays on after you have released the parking brake, contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Engaged
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service. See an
authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction Service Now
The electric parking brake is not set.Park Brake Not Applied
The electric parking brake is running a diagnostic check.Park Brake Maintenance Mode
The electric parking brake is set but you have not released it.Park Brake Use Switch to Release
126
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
ActionMessage
The electric parking brake is set but you have not released it and your vehicle is moving.Press Brake To Release Park Brake and
Switch
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized
dealer.
Park Brake Limited Function Service
Required
You have not released the electric parking brake causing it to overheat.Park Brake System Overheated
The electric parking brake is set and you have started your vehicle.Release Park Brake
The electric parking brake is set.Park Brake Applied
You have released the electric parking brake.Park Brake Released
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized
dealer.
Steering Fault Service Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Steering Loss Stop Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passive
entry or passive start system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault Service Required
127
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Remote Start
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button to drive your vehicle after a remote
start.
To Drive: Press Brake and Gear Shift
Button
Seats
ActionMessage
A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall Not Permitted While Driving
Shows where you have saved your memory setting.Memory X Saved
Starting System
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .Press Brake to Start
The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start your vehicle.Cranking Time Exceeded
The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.Engine Start Pending Please Wait
The system has cancelled the pending start.Pending Start Cancelled
128
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 330).
LOW Tire Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 330).
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 330). If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Traction Control
ActionMessage
The status of the traction control system after you switched it off or on. See Using Traction
Control (page 188).
Traction Control Off / Traction Control On
A spinout has occurred and the hazards are on.Spinout Detected Hazards Activated
129
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Trailer
ActionMessage
Displays when the trailer sway control has detected a trailer sway. See Trailer Sway Control
(page 241).
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
Transmission
ActionMessage
See an authorized dealer.Transmission Malfunction Service Now
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as possible.Transmission Overheating Stop Safely
See an authorized dealer.Transmission Service Required
The transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.Transmission Too Hot Press Brake
The transmission has overheated and has limited functionality. See Automatic Transmission
(page 172).
Transmission Limited Function See Manual
The transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you drive.Transmission Warming Up Please Wait
A reminder to shift into park. In addition, this message is typical after reconnecting or recharging
the battery until you cycle the ignition to the on mode. See Changing the 12V Battery (page
294).
Transmission Not in Park
The transmission has adjusted the shift strategy.Transmission Adjusted
130
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
ActionMessage
The transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.Transmission Adapt Mode
The transmission is locked and unable to select gears.Transmission Indicate Mode Lockup On
The transmission is unlocked and free to select gears.Transmission Indicate Mode Lockup Off
You have selected an invalid gear.Invalid Gear Selection
You need to depress the brake pedal.Press Brake Pedal
You need to depress the brake pedal before you can shift from P park.Depress Brake to Shift from Park
You need to press the N neutral button again to enter neutral hold. See Automatic Transmission
(page 172).
Press N again to Enter Stay in Neutral
Mode
Neutral hold is active. See Automatic Transmission (page 172).Stay in Neutral Mode Engaged
Neutral hold is active. See Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 247).Stay in Neutral Tow Engaged See Manual
to Disable
There is a system fault and you need to depress the park brake before you exit your vehicle.
See an authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Confirm Park Brake
Apply Before Exiting the Vehicle
There is a system fault and you need to depress the park brake before you exit your vehicle.
See an authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Cannot Shift Trans Use
Park Brake to Secure Vehicle
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Service Required
There is a system fault while you are shifting your vehicle to P park. See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Vehicle is Shifting to
Park
131
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
ActionMessage
There is a system fault while you are shifting your vehicle to R reverse. See your authorized
dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Reverse Unavailable
Service Required
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Drive Unavailable Select
S for Drive Service Required
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Neutral Unavailable
Service Required
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Sport Unavailable
Service Required
Neutral tow is active and you need to turn the ignition off. See Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels (page 247).
Neutral Tow Engaged Turn Ignition Off for
Towing
While attempting to exit neutral tow, you need to depress the brake pedal and select the P park
button to deactivate. See Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 247).
Neutral Tow Engaged Depress Brake and
Select Park to Exit Neutral Tow
Neutral tow is active and you need to release the park brake. See Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels (page 247).
Neutral Tow Remove Park Brake for
Towing
You have switched off Neutral tow.Neutral Tow Disengaged
132
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See SYNC
Supplement.
E211718
133
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
Left-hand temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting using the control on the left-hand side. This control also adjusts the
right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode.
A
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.B
Right-hand temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the right-hand side.C
MAX A/C: Press the button for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning
automatically turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
D
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the
time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents.
E
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
F
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during
hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.
Heated seats: Press the button to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 146).G
Climate controlled seats: Press the button to switch the climate controlled seats on and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page
147).
H
DUAL: Press the button to switch separate passenger side temperature control off and on. When dual zone is off, passenger
temperature settings remain the same as the driver settings.
I
Note: Dual zone automatically turns on when you adjust the right-hand settings.
AUTO: Press the button to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air
conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired
temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds.
J
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.K
134
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns
off. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
L
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 136).M
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary. The system automatically adjusts
to heat or cool the cabin to your selected
temperature as quickly as possible. For the
system to function efficiently, the instrument
panel and side air vents should be fully
open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
135
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1. Select the MAX A/C function.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
1. Press the defrost button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Vehicles with Hands Free Calling and
Voice Control
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically reduce while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply adjust the fan speed
control to increase or decrease fan speed
to desired setting.
To disable the automatic fan speed reduction
feature during voice sessions, press and hold
the AC and recirculated air buttons
simultaneously, release and then increase
fan speed within 2 seconds. To re-enable
this feature (if disabled), repeat the above
sequence.
HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS
Heated Windows
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
Heated Rear Window
E72507
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice and
fog. The heated rear window will
automatically turn off after a short period of
time. Start the engine before you switch the
heated rear window on.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
136
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
•It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
•It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
•It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
Your cabin air filter is located inside the
instrument panel and left of the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Maintenance (page 282).
For additional cabin air filter information, or
to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer.
REMOTE START
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle. The
climate control system works to achieve
comfort according to your pre-selected
settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation. You cannot switch
on the displays or indicators during remote
start.
Switch the ignition on to return the system
to its pre-selected settings. You can now
make adjustments normally, but you need to
switch certain vehicle-dependent features
back on, such as:
•Heated seats.
•Cooled seats.
•Heated steering wheel.
•Heated mirrors.
•Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays (page
109).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either heats
or cools (based on pre-selected settings).
The rear defroster, heated mirrors and
heated seats do not automatically switch on.
137
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster and
heated mirrors automatically switch on.
138
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far can
take weight off the seat cushion and affect
the decision of the passenger sensing
system, resulting in serious injury or death
in the event of a crash. Always sit upright
against your seat back, with your feet on the
floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this can
cause the occupant to slide under the
safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during heavy
braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
•Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
•Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
•Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.
•Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm)
between your breastbone and the airbag
cover.
•Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
•Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
•Position the shoulder strap of the safety
belt over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head
restraint when your vehicle is moving.
139
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when the
seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the head
restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback (front seats only)
to an upright driving position before
adjusting the head restraint. Adjust the head
restraint so that the top of it is level with the
top of your head and as far forward as
possible. Make sure that you remain
comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust
the head restraint to its highest position.
Front seat head restraint
E138642
Rear seat outboard head restraints
E138643
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust (front seat
only) and unlock button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Fold button.E
Rear center head restraint
E211925
140
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Information Provided by:
The rear center head restraint consists of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Front Seat Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Front Seat Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Folding the Rear Seat Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button E.
2. Pull it back up to reset.
Tilting Head Restraints
The front seat head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving
or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
141
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Information Provided by:
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver's seat or
WARNINGS
seatback when your vehicle is moving.
Adjusting your seatback while your vehicle
is in motion may cause loss of control of your
vehicle.
WARNINGS
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
142
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Information Provided by:
E144632
143
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Information Provided by:
Power Lumbar
E165608
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions
and that all occupants are clear of moving
parts.
Do not use the memory function when
your vehicle is moving.
This feature will automatically recall the
position of the driver seat, power mirrors and
optional power steering column. The memory
control is located on the driver door.
E142554
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat, exterior mirrors and
power steering column to your desired
position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset button
until you hear a single tone.
Note: A confirmation that a memory preset
is saved will appear in the information
display.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset at
any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving position.
The seat, mirrors and steering column will
move to the position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position when the ignition is off, or when you
place the transmission in park (P) or neutral
(N) if the ignition is on.
Note: Press any seat or mirror adjustment
switch (or any memory button) during a
memory recall to cancel the operation.
144
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Information Provided by:
You can also recall a preset memory position
by:
•Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked to
a preset position.
•Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
•Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Keyless Entry
(page 73).
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off will
move the seat and steering column to the
Easy Entry position.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to three remote controls or
intelligent access (IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset button
for about five seconds. A tone will sound
after about two seconds. Continue
holding until a second tone is heard.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the same
procedure – except in Step 3, press the
unlock button on the remote control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit feature,
it automatically moves the driver seat
position rearward up to two inches (five
centimeters) when you switch the ignition
off. The driver seat will return to the previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 109).
REAR SEATS
E171298
145
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Information Provided by:
Folding the Seatback
With the seat empty, pull the lever up to fold
the seatback forward. You may need to fold
the outboard head restraints and lower the
center head restraint first.
Unfolding the Seatback
Pull the seatback upward to unfold the
seatback.
Recline Adjustment
With the seat occupied, pull the lever up to
recline the seatback.
HEATED SEATS
Front Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain to
their skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the heated seat. The heated seat may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the heated seat to
overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles or other pointed objects. This may
damage the heating element which may
cause the heated seat to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious personal
injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
•Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
146
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Information Provided by:
Rear Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat
with pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
•Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is on,
press the high or low heated seat switch to
enable heating mode. When activated, they
will turn off automatically when you turn the
engine off.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (If
Equipped)
Heated Seats
147
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Information Provided by:
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat
with pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
•Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Touch the heated seat symbol on the
touchscreen to cycle through the various
heat settings and off. More indicator lights
indicate warmer settings.
Cooled Seats (If Equipped)
The cooled seats will only function when the
engine is running.
E146309
Touch the cooled seat symbol on the
touchscreen to cycle through the various
cool settings and off. More indicator lights
indicate cooler settings.
REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped)
E138656
148
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Information Provided by:
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest
and cupholder.
149
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Information Provided by:
HomeLink Wireless Control System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are programming. Do
not program the system with the vehicle in
the garage.
Do not use the system with any garage
door opener that does not have the
safety stop and reverse feature as required
by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this
includes any garage door opener
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse, does
not meet current federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious injury
or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the
three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the current
settings. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
As well as being programmed for garage
doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks and home
or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found
online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by
calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: The programming steps below assume
you will be programming HomeLink that was
not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
150
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press
and hold the desired HomeLink button
and the hand-held transmitter button. DO
NOT release either one until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly. When the indicator light
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapid flashing indicates
successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further action
is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed yet.
See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps
1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door Opener
Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
151
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release, every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter until
the HomeLink indicator light changes
from a slow to a rapidly blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
above the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
152
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the transmitter
into programming mode.
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from green to
red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want to
program. The indicator light on the visor
will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for
up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must be
changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from red to red
and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the indicator
light will turn green.
153
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until both
blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will flash.
Note: The next two steps must be completed
in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator lights
on the garage door opener motor unit
should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and the
indicator light should blink slowly to indicate
the device is in train mode when any of the
three HomeLink buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance can void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
154
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNINGS
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Do not use a power point for operating
a cigar lighter. Incorrect use of the
power points can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an accessory
plug into the power point. This will damage
the power point and blow the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
•Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
•Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
•On the front of the center console.
•Inside the center console.
•On the rear of the center console.
•Inside the luggage compartment.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices plugged
in the power point whenever the
device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110 volt AC power
point, since it will defeat the safety protection
design. Doing so may cause the power point
to overload due to powering multiple devices
that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit
and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point will turn off when the
ignition is switched off or the battery voltage
drops below 11 volts.
Use the power point for powering electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on
the rear of the center console.
155
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
Information Provided by:
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
•On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged in.
•Off: The power point is off, the ignition is
off or no device is plugged in.
•Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off power
when in fault mode if the device exceeds the
150 watt limit. Unplug your device and
switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition
back on, but do not plug your device back
in. Let the system cool off and switch the
ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch
the ignition back on and make sure the
indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
•Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
•Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven refrigerators.
•Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical equipment
or measuring equipment.
•Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
156
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
Information Provided by:
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
ABC
D
E171511
Front storage bin with auxiliary
power point and media hub.
A
Cup holder.B
Storage compartment with auxiliary
power point.
C
Auxiliary power point, 110 volt AC
power outlet (if equipped).
D
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E131605
Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.
TICKET HOLDERS
E170447
Slide your toll ticket in the space provided.
157
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Storage Compartments
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine speeds
can produce very high temperatures
in the engine and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8
kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving characteristics
during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
Ignition Modes
E191075
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
•Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once when the
ignition is in the on mode, or when the
engine is running but the vehicle is not
moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational and
the warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
•Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once.
158
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Information Provided by:
Note: You may have to press the push
button ignition switch twice to switch the
ignition on.
Start: Starts the engine.
•Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases, this helps to warm up the engine.
If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with remote
start, you can start your vehicle with the
remote, and then drive away by pressing the
brake pedal and pushing a button on the
transmission. This allows you to drive away
without pressing the engine start button.
Before starting the engine, check the
following:
•Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
•Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
•Make sure the parking brake is on.
•Put the transmission in P.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the button.
The system does not function if:
•The key frequencies are jammed.
•The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start the engine, do the
following:
E170454
1. Open the center console lid.
2. Slide the remote into the back-up slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal, then the START button to
switch the ignition on and start your
vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
the engine within 20 seconds of switching it
off, even if a valid key is not present.
159
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Information Provided by:
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
button. After 20 seconds have expired, you
can no longer restart the engine without the
key present inside your vehicle.
Once the engine has started, it remains
running until you press the button, even if
the system does not detect a valid key. If you
open and close a door while the engine is
running, the system searches for a valid key.
You cannot restart the engine if the system
does not detect a valid key within 20
seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds (without the engine starting)
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. A message appears in
the information display alerting you that you
exceeded the cranking time. You cannot
attempt to start the engine for at least 15
minutes. After 15 minutes, you are limited to
a 15-second engine cranking time. You need
to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the
engine for 60 seconds again.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling
for an extended period. The ignition also
turns off in order to save battery power.
Before the engine shuts down, a message
appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down from 30 seconds. If
you do not intervene within 30 seconds, the
engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to inform
you that the engine has shut down in order
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you
normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off the
automatic engine shutdown feature. When
you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at
the next ignition cycle.
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset
the timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
160
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Information Provided by:
•You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle (such as pressing the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal).
•You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition is
on (for the current ignition cycle only).
Use the information display to do so. See
Information Displays (page 109).
•During the countdown before engine
shutdown, you are prompted to press OK
or RESET (depending on your type of
information display) to temporarily switch
the feature off (for the current ignition
cycle only).
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Put the transmission in position P.
2. Press the button once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, all
electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not lock, but higher effort will
be required. When the ignition is switched
off, some electrical circuits, including air
bags, warning lamps and indicators may also
be off. If the ignition was turned off
accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and
re-start the engine.
1. Put the transmission in position N and
use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a
safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, put the
transmission in position P.
3. Press and hold the button for one
second, or press it three times within two
seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust
fumes. Take precautions to avoid its
dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and the leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the following:
•Open the windows at least 1 in (2.5 cm).
•Set your climate control to outside air.
161
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Information Provided by:
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow it
to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This could
damage the power cable and may cause an
electrical short resulting in fire, injury and
property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming
the engine coolant. This allows the climate
control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element
(installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a
grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
•Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
•Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
•Do not use multiple extension cords.
•Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord plug
connections are free and clear of water.
This could cause an electric shock or fire.
•Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
•Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
•Check for heat anywhere in the electrical
hookup once the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
•Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
•Make sure the heater system is checked
for proper operation before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
162
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Information Provided by:
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel capless
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound
stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which
could cause serious personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle
can produce static electricity. This can
cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded
fuel container.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing
agent.
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the filler neck. Never smoke or
use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor
is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
•Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
•Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
•Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is
highly toxic and if swallowed can cause
death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may
not be visible for hours.
•Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to
eye and respiratory tract irritation. In
severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
•Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with water
for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.
163
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
•Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and wash
skin thoroughly with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact with
fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
•Be particularly careful if you are taking
“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing
gasoline vapors, or skin contact could
cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or
sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly
with soap and water. Consult a physician
immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as regular
with an octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. We do not recommend
fuels with an octane rating below 87. To
provide improved performance, we
recommend premium fuel for severe duty
usage such as trailer tow.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
•Diesel fuel.
•Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
•Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
•Fuels containing methanol.
•Fuels containing metallic-based additives,
including manganese-based compounds.
•Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
•Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which
is a manganese-based fuel additive, will
impair engine performance and affect the
emission control system.
164
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
knocks heavily under most driving conditions
while you are using fuel with the
recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare
wheel storage tray.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
•Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to
restart the engine. If your vehicle is out
of fuel and on a steep slope, more fuel
may be required.
•You may need to switch the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling to
allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When
restarting, cranking time takes a few
seconds longer than normal.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
•Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
•Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
•Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel into
the fuel system filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the household
refuse or the public sewage system.
Use an authorized waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, use the plastic funnel included
with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler Funnel
Location (page 165).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they
will not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, do the following:
165
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it
engages and remove the fuel tank filler
cap.
Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a
fuel tank filler cap.
2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and close
the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it back
in your vehicle or properly dispose of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries.
Read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island.
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never
smoke or use a cell phone while refueling.
Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under
certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess
fumes.
WARNINGS
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow
any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank.
Stop refueling after the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
second time. Failure to follow this will fill the
expansion space in the fuel tank and could
lead to fuel overflowing.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
166
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded
fuel container:
•Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
•Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
the vehicle (including the cargo area).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
•Do not use a device that would hold the
fuel pump handle in the fill position.
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System
WARNING
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into
park (P) and switch the ignition off.
2. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it
engages.
E156032
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first
notch on the nozzle. Hold handle higher
during insertion for easier access. Leave
the fuel pump nozzle fully inserted until
you are done pumping.
E154765
4. Remove the fuel filler nozzle and fully
close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the
tank. The fill pipe is equipped with a drain
hole. Excess fuel due to overfill may drain
through the drain hole and drip onto the
ground.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed, a
service engine warning lamp may appear on
the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
167
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any
visible debris from the fuel fill opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel
fill funnel provided with the vehicle
several times to allow the inlet to close
properly. This will dislodge any debris
preventing the inlet from sealing.
If this action corrects the problem, the
message may not reset immediately. It may
take several driving cycles for the message
to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an
engine start-up (after 4 or more hours with
the engine off) followed by city or highway
driving. Continuing to drive with the message
on may cause the service engine soon lamp
to turn on as well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range. When refueling
your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates
empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still
present in the tank.
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. Do not rely on this fuel for
driving. The usable capacity of the fuel tank
is the amount of fuel that can be put into the
tank after the gauge indicates empty. The
advertised capacity is the total fuel tank size
– it is the combined usable capacity plus the
empty reserve.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
•Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
•Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high)
each time the tank is filled.
•Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of driving
(this is your engine’s break-in period); a more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2000 miles - 3000 miles (3200 kilometers -
4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense,
frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings
are not accurate ways to measure fuel
economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
168
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
3. After at least three to five tank fill ups, fill
the fuel tank and record the current
odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing miles
traveled by gallons used (For Metric:
Multiply liters used by 100, then divide
by kilometers traveled).
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of the
vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving
conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how
temperature impacts fuel economy. In
general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel
economy.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can
start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If you smell
exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your
dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a catalytic
converter that will enable your vehicle to
comply with applicable exhaust emission
standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control
components continue to work properly:
•Use only the specified fuel listed.
•Avoid running out of fuel.
•Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
•Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of your
vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of components
affecting emission control, such non-Ford
parts should be the equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance
and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
169
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust
system may allow exhaust to enter the
vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly
operating exhaust system inspected and
repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are
not permitted to intentionally remove an
emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s
emission system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information Decal located on or near
the engine. This decal also lists engine
displacement
Please consult your warranty information for
complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the environment
by making sure that your vehicle continues
to meet government emission standards. The
OBD-II system also assists a service
technician in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
•the vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
•poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
•the fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 166).
•driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet
or letting the electrical system dry out. After
three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should stay off
the next time you start the engine. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city/highway driving. No
additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not
have symptoms that are apparent, continued
driving with the service engine soon indicator
on can result in increased emissions, lower
fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more
costly repairs.
170
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) Testing
Some state/provincial and local governments
may have Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from
getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator
is on or the bulb does not work,
you may need to have the vehicle
serviced. See On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the
service engine soon indicator is on or not
working properly (bulb is burned out), or if
the OBD-II system has determined that some
of the emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case, your
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle
is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the
ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds
without cranking the engine. If the service
engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it
means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator
stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is
ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you may
need to perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
Drive on an expressway or highway for a
steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes
of stop-and-go driving with at least four
30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours
without starting the engine. Then, start the
engine and complete the above driving
cycle. The engine must warm up to its normal
operating temperature. Once started, do not
turn off the engine until the above driving
cycle is complete. If the vehicle is still not
ready for I/M testing, you will have to repeat
the above driving cycle.
171
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure your vehicle is in park (P).
Turn the ignition off whenever you leave your
vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously for
more than three seconds will limit engine
rpm, which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.
Push Button Shift Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
transmission. The shift buttons are located
on the instrument panel next to the
touchscreen. The gears are selected by
pressing and releasing the PRNDS buttons.
E146223
Every time a gear is selected, the selected
button will light up. You will also see the gear
selected appear in the instrument cluster.
E155989
Understanding the Positions of your
Electronic Transmission
Note: Always come to a complete stop
before putting your vehicle into and out of
park (P).
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Press and release the button on the
instrument panel of the gear you want to
select.
3. The gearshift button you select will
illuminate and the selected gear will
appear in the instrument cluster.
4. Release the brake pedal and your
transmission will remain in the selected
gear.
Note: If you attempt to leave your vehicle
while it is in gear, the vehicle will
automatically shift into park (P). Safety belt
and door monitors determine your intent and
make the shift for you. During this time, a
message will appear in the information
display screen prompting you to make the
shift.
172
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Information Provided by:
Note: To put your vehicle in gear with the
door open, perform steps 1-4. See the
Automatic Return to Park section in this
chapter for more information on this feature.
Park (P)
With the transmission in park (P), your vehicle
locks the transmission and prevents the front
wheels from turning. Always come to a
complete stop before putting your vehicle
into and out of park (P). An audible chime
sounds once you select park (P).
When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle
will automatically shift into park (P). If the
ignition is turned off while the vehicle is
moving, it will first shift into neutral (N) until
a slow enough speed is reached. The vehicle
will then shift into park (P) automatically.
Automatic Return to Park
Note: This feature will not operate when your
vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode or neutral
tow.
Your vehicle has a safety feature that will
automatically shift your vehicle into park (P)
when any of the following conditions occur:
•You turn the ignition off
•You open the driver's door with your
safety belt unlatched
•Your safety belt is unlatched while the
driver's door is open
If you turn the ignition off while your vehicle
is moving, your vehicle will first shift into
neutral (N) until it slows down enough to shift
into park (P) automatically.
Note: If you have waited an extended period
of time, (2-15 minutes) before starting your
vehicle, unlatching your safety belt will cause
this feature to activate, even with the driver's
door closed.
Note: This feature may not work properly if
the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If your
door ajar indicator does not illuminate when
you open the driver’s door or the indicator
illuminates with the driver’s door closed, see
your authorized dealer.
Reverse (R)
With the transmission in reverse (R), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the transmission in neutral (N), you can
start your vehicle and it is free to roll. Hold
the brake pedal down while in this position.
Stay in Neutral mode
Stay in Neutral mode allows your vehicle to
stay in neutral (N) when you exit the vehicle.
Your vehicle must be stationary to enter this
mode.
To enter Stay in Neutral mode:
1. Press the neutral (N) button on your
shifter assembly.
2. A message will appear in your
information display.
3. Press the neutral (N) button again to
enter Stay in Neutral mode.
173
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Information Provided by:
A message will appear in your information
display screen when your vehicle has
entered Stay in Neutral mode.
Note: During this mode the N button will
flash continuously and your instrument
cluster will display N as the selected gear.
Exiting Stay in Neutral mode
To disable Stay in Neutral mode select
another gear. See the Putting the Vehicle
in Gear for instructions on how to do this.
Entering a Carwash
Note: Always put your vehicle in Stay in
Neutral mode when entering an automatic
car wash. Failure to do this could result in
vehicle damage not covered by warranty.
Drive (D)
The normal driving position for the best fuel
economy.
Sport (S)
Putting the vehicle in sport (S):
•Provides additional engine braking and
extends lower gear operation to enhance
performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain
or mountainous areas. This will increase
engine RPM during engine braking
•Provides additional lower gear operation
through the automatic transmission shift
strategy
•Provides gear selection more quickly and
at higher engine speeds
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission
Your SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears
manually.
Paddle Shifters
With your vehicle in drive (D), the paddle
shifters provide temporary manual control.
They allow you the ability to shift gears
quickly, without taking your hands off the
steering wheel.
You can achieve extensive manual control
by pressing the sport (S) button.
•Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
•Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
E144821
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
174
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Information Provided by:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
mph (km/h)
Gear Upshift
ToFrom
15 mph (24 km/h)21
25 mph (40 km/h)32
40 mph (64 km/h)43
45 mph (72 km/h)54
50 mph (80 km/h)65
The instrument cluster will display your
currently selected gear.
E155990
The transmission will automatically upshift if
your engine speed is too high or downshift
if your engine speed is too low.
Note: The system will stay in manual control
until you make another shift button selection.
For example, drive (D).
Brake-Shift Interlock Override
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are working.
175
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking the vehicle out of park which
means the vehicle can roll freely. To avoid
unwanted vehicle movement, always fully
set the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
Note: For some markets this feature is
disabled.
Use the brake-shift interlock override to
move your transmission from the park
position in the event of an electrical
malfunction or if your vehicle has a dead
battery.
1. Apply the parking brake and turn your
ignition off before performing this
procedure.
E180636
2. Locate your brake-shift interlock access
slot. The slot is located in your center
console storage bin. The access slot
does not have a label.
Note: Make sure that you correctly identify
the access hole as not to damage the media
hub.
3. Using a tool, press and hold the brake
shift interlock switch. The shift buttons
on the instrument panel will flash when
your vehicle is in override mode.
4. With the override switch still held, press
the neutral button (N) to shift from park.
5. Release the override button.
6. Your vehicle will remain in Stay in Neutral
mode for wrecker towing purposes or
can be shifted to the desired gear and
driven (if possible).
7. Release the parking brake.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature increases durability and provides
consistent shift feel over the life of your
vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may
have firm or soft shifts. This operation will
not affect function or durability of your
transmission and is normal. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation. Additionally, the
strategy must be relearned whenever the
battery is disconnected or a new battery is
installed.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if your engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to your transmission may occur.
176
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Information Provided by:
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to your transmission
and tires may occur, or your engine may
overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you can help rock your vehicle out by shifting
between forward and reverse gears,
stopping between shifts in a steady pattern.
Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
177
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Information Provided by:
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
Note: When a system malfunction is present,
a warning message appears in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 115). This means the system
is not functioning correctly and only
front-wheel drive is available. Have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: When the system overheats and
switches to front-wheel drive, a warning
message appears in the information display.
This may occur if you operate your vehicle
in extreme high load conditions or with
excessive wheel spin (for example, deep
sand). To resume all-wheel drive function,
stop your vehicle in a safe location and turn
off the ignition. When the system cools,
normal all-wheel drive function will return.
The information display indicates, for about
five seconds, this return.
Note: When using the spare tire, a warning
message may appear in the information
display. This message turns off after
reinstalling the repaired or replaced road
tire and you switch on the ignition.
Note: Re-install the repaired tire or replace
the tire as soon as possible. Different tire
sizes between the front and rear axles can
cause system damage, or turn off the
all-wheel drive.
This system anticipates wheel spin and
transfers power to the rear wheels before
the spin occurs. Even when wheel spin is not
occurring, the system is continuously
adjusting power distribution to the wheels,
in an attempt to improve straight line and
cornering, both on and off road.
The system automatically turns on every time
you switch on the ignition.
The all-wheel drive system does not require
maintenance.
The all-wheel drive system gives your vehicle
some limited off-road capabilities. Operating
your vehicle in conditions other than
moderate sand, snow, mud or rough roads
could subject it to excessive stress and heat.
This could result in system damage. Your
vehicle warranty will not cover this damage.
E142669
The information display indicates the power
distribution between the front and rear
wheels. The more the area is filled the more
power is being distributed to that wheel.
Driving in Special Conditions With All-
Wheel Drive
All-wheel drive vehicles are capable of
driving on moderate sand, snow, mud and
rough roads. All-wheel drive has operating
characteristics that are somewhat different
from two-wheel drive, both on and off the
freeway.
Note: It may be useful to switch the traction
control off. This allows for more wheel spin
and engine torque in certain off road
conditions or if your vehicle becomes stuck.
178
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
When driving at slow speeds off road under
high load conditions, use a low gear when
possible. Low gear operation will maximize
the engine and transmission cooling
capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the air
conditioning may cycle on and off to prevent
the engine from overheating.
Basic Operating Principles
•Drive slower in strong crosswinds that
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
•When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
Once you have reduced your vehicle speed,
ease your vehicle back onto the road. Do
not turn the steering wheel sharply while
returning your vehicle to the road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of the
road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than attempt
an abrupt dangerous direction change.
Remember, your primary concern should be
your safety and the safety of others.
Emergency Maneuvers
If you must make a sudden emergency
direction change, avoid over-driving your
vehicle. Turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as you need to avoid the
emergency. Apply smooth pressure to the
accelerator pedal or brake pedal as needed.
Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration and
braking changes. Abrupt changes could
increase the risk of vehicle roll over, loss of
vehicle control and personal injury. Use all
available road surface to bring your vehicle
to under control.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding and do not attempt any sharp
steering wheel movements.
Your vehicle responds differently to steering,
accelerating and braking on different road
surfaces when changing from one type of
surface to another.
Sand
When driving over sand, avoid driving at
excessive speeds. This will cause your
vehicle momentum to work against you. Your
vehicle could become stuck that may require
assistance from another vehicle. Remember,
if you proceed with caution you may be able
to back out the way you came.
Do not drive in deep sand for an extended
period. This will cause the all-wheel drive
system to overheat. You will see a warning
message in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 115).
179
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
To resume operation, switch the ignition off
and allow the system to cool down for a
minimum of 15 minutes. After the system has
cooled down, you will see a brief message
display in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 115).
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Low gear operation will
maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Tips when driving over sand:
•Keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail.
•Shift to a lower gear.
•Apply the accelerator slowly.
•Drive steadily through the terrain.
•Avoid excessive wheel spin.
•Avoid reducing the tire pressures.
Mud and Water
Mud
Avoid sudden changes in vehicle speed or
direction when you are driving in mud. Even
all-wheel drive vehicles can lose traction in
mud. If your vehicle does slide, steer in the
direction of the slide until you regain control
of your vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off excess
mud stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Water
Drive slowly through high water. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the wheel rims. If the ignition
system gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes will not stop your vehicle as
quickly as dry brakes. Apply light pressure
to the brake pedal while slowly moving the
vehicle to dry the brakes.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, have the power
transfer unit (PTU) or rear axle serviced by
an authorized dealer.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, always try to drive
straight up or straight down the sloping
terrain.
Note: To maintain traction and avoid
possibly rolling your vehicle, avoid turning
on steep slopes or hills. When you drive on
a hill, determine beforehand the route you
will use. Do not drive over a hill without first
seeing what is on the other side. Do not drive
in reverse over a hill without the aid of an
observer.
180
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Start climbing a steep slope or hill in a low
gear rather than downshifting to a low gear
from a high gear after you have started your
climb. This reduces strain on the engine and
the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
around. Turning could cause the vehicle to
roll over. Instead, reverse back to a safe
location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause the
tires to slip, spin or lose traction, and you
could lose control of your vehicle.
E143949
To avoid brake overheating, come down a
hill in the same gear you used to go up the
hill. Do not come down in neutral. Move the
transmission selector lever to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden
hard braking to keep the front wheels rolling
and to maintain your vehicle's steering.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. Apply the
brakes steadily. Do not pump the brake
pedal.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery conditions
that require tire chains or cables, then
it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep
speeds down, allow for longer stopping
distances and avoid aggressive steering to
reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle
control which can lead to serious injury or
death. If the rear end of your vehicle slides
while cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of your vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
In snow and ice, all-wheel drive vehicles have
advantages over two-wheel drive vehicles
but can still skid. When driving on snowy or
icy roads, should you start to slide, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide
until you regain control.
On snow and ice, avoid suddenly applying
power and avoid quick change of direction.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a stop.
Avoid sudden braking. An all-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice.
However, an all-wheel drive vehicle will not
stop any faster, as braking occurs at all four
wheels. Do not become overconfident to
road conditions.
181
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Make sure that you allow sufficient distance
between your vehicle and other vehicles for
stopping. On ice and snow, you should drive
more slowly than usual, and consider using
one of the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, steadily apply the brake.
Your vehicle has a four wheel anti-lock brake
system, do not pump the brake pedal. See
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
(page 183).
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud or
snow, shift between forward and reverse
gears, and, in a steady pattern, stop between
shifts. Press lightly on the accelerator with
each shift. Rocking your vehicle this way may
dislodge your vehicle.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute, damage to the transmission and
tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle provides predictable
performance whether your vehicle is loaded
or empty. For this reason, we recommend
that you do not make modifications to your
vehicle (lift kits or stabilizer bars) or use
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(ladder or luggage racks). Modifications to
your vehicle that raise the center of gravity
may cause your vehicle to tip if you should
lose vehicle control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly may
void the warranty, increase your repair cost,
reduce vehicle performance and operational
capabilities, and adversely affect you and
your passenger's safety. We recommend that
you frequently inspect your vehicle's chassis
components if your vehicle is subject to
off-road use.
182
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy Wheels
(page 310).
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 104).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move
the transmission to park (P), switch the
engine off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake rapidly
by measuring the rate at which you press the
brake pedal. It provides maximum braking
efficiency as long as you press the pedal,
and can reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates
when you turn the ignition on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the system
may be disabled. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
E144522
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-
LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal will pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
183
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
Information Provided by:
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
•You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
•Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
•You take corners too fast.
•The road surface is poor.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
The electric parking brake replaces the
conventional handbrake. The operating
switch is located on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel.
WARNING
Always set the parking brake and leave
your vehicle with the transmission in
position P.
Note: When you apply the electric parking
brake in certain conditions, for example on
a steep hill, the electric parking brake may
reapply the brakes within three to ten
minutes.
Note: You may notice various noises when
you apply and release the electric parking
brake. This is normal and no cause for
concern.
Applying the electric parking brake
WARNING
The brake system warning lamp will
flash during an electric brake apply. If
the brake system warning lamp continues to
flash there could be a problem with your
electric parking brake. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Note: The brake system warning lamp will
illuminate for ten seconds if you have turned
the ignition off after the electric parking
brake has been applied, or the electric
parking brake has been applied after the
ignition has been turned off.
Note: The electric parking brake will not
automatically apply. You must apply the
electric parking brake using the electric
parking brake switch.
E169085
Pull the switch to apply the electric parking
brake.
The brake system warning lamp will flash for
approximately 2 seconds then illuminate to
confirm that the electric parking brake has
been applied. See Instrument Cluster (page
102).
184
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
Information Provided by:
Applying the electric parking brake
when the vehicle is moving
WARNINGS
Applying the electric parking brake
while moving will result in use of the
anti-lock braking system. Do not use the
electric parking brake system when the
vehicle is moving unless the normal brake
system is unable to stop the vehicle.
With the exception of emergency
conditions (for example, the brake
pedal does not work or is blocked), do not
apply the electric parking brake while the
vehicle is moving. On bends, or poor road
surfaces or weather conditions, emergency
braking can cause the vehicle to skid out of
control or off the road.
If you apply the electric parking brake when
your vehicle is moving, the brake system
warning lamp will illuminate and a warning
chime will sound. See Instrument Cluster
(page 102).
If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph (6
km/h), the braking force is applied as long
as the switch is applied. Release or press the
switch or press the accelerator pedal to stop
the braking force.
Releasing the electric parking brake
E169086
You can release the electric parking brake
either manually by pressing the bottom of
the switch or automatically.
Manual release
WARNING
If the brake system warning light
remains illuminated or flashes after you
have released the parking brake, there could
be a problem with you braking system. Have
the system checked by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
You can manually release the electric parking
brake by turning the ignition on, pressing the
brake pedal and then pressing the electric
parking brake switch down.
When the electric parking brake is released,
the brake system warning lamp will turn off.
Driving with a Trailer
Depending on the grade and the weight of
the trailer, your vehicle and trailer may roll
backwards slightly when you start on a slope.
To prevent this from happening, do the
following:
185
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
Information Provided by:
1. Pull the switch and hold it in this position.
2. Drive your vehicle, then release the
switch when you notice that the engine
has developed sufficient driving force.
Automatic release - drive away release
Your vehicle will automatically release the
parking brake if all of the following conditions
exist:
•The driver door is closed.
•The vehicle is accelerated.
•There are no faults detected in the
parking brake system.
Note: The driver door must be closed and
the driver safety belt must be fastened
before this feature will operate.
Note: If the electric parking brake warning
lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking
brake will not automatically release. You
must release the electric parking brake using
the electric parking brake switch.
Note: The engine must be running and the
accelerator pedal must be pressed before
the drive away release feature will operate.
The brake system warning lamp will go off
to confirm that the electric parking brake has
been released.
Note: The electric parking brake drive away
release makes starting on a hill easier. This
feature will release the parking brake
automatically when the vehicle has sufficient
drive force to move up the hill. To assure
drive away release when starting uphill,
press the accelerator pedal quickly.
Battery With No Charge
WARNING
You will not be able to apply or release
the electric parking brake if the battery
is low or has no charge.
If the battery is low or has no charge, use
jumper cables and a booster battery.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking brake and
shift the transmission into park (P) (automatic
transmission) or first gear (1) (manual
transmission).
You must remain in your vehicle once
you have activated the system.
During all times, you are responsible
for controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening, if required.
If the engine is revved excessively, or
if a malfunction is detected, the system
will be deactivated.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
186
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
Information Provided by:
When the system is active, your vehicle will
remain stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows you time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The
brakes release automatically when the
engine has sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the grade. This is
an advantage when pulling away on a slope,
for example from a car park ramp, traffic
lights or when reversing uphill into a parking
space.
The system will activate automatically on any
slope that will cause significant vehicle
rollback. For vehicles with a manual
transmission, you can switch this feature off
using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 109). The system
will remain on or off depending on how it
was last set.
Note: There is no warning lamp to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Auto
Hold, Hill Start Assist will not be available
while Auto Hold is active.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete
standstill. Keep the brake pedal pressed
and select and uphill gear (for example,
first (1) when facing uphill or reverse (R)
when facing downhill).
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is
on a slope, the system will activate
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain on
the slope without rolling away for about
two or three seconds. This hold time will
automatically be extended if you are in
the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
brakes will release automatically.
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch this feature on or off if your
vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission and an information display. See
General Information (page 109). The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a manual
transmission and an information display, you
cannot turn the system on or off. When you
switch the ignition on, the system
automatically turns on.
187
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
Information Provided by:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces engine power at the
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING
The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily if the system
detects a failure. Make sure you did not
manually disable the traction control system
using the information display controls or the
switch. If the stability control and traction
control light is still illuminating steadily, have
the system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with the
traction control disabled could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information display
showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either using
the information display controls or the switch.
Using the Information Display Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General Information
(page 109).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off or
on.
The switch illuminates when traction control
is off.
System Indicator Lights and Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light:
188
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
Information Provided by:
•Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
•Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
•Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on when
you switch the traction control system off.
189
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
Information Provided by:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving braking
system, aftermarket roof racks,
suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability control
system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front
center console, the tunnel, and the front
seats in order to minimize the risk of
interfering with the electronic stability control
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the
electronic stability control system could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNINGS
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose control
of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose control
of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal
injury or property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this
could reduce the operator’s ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. If your electronic stability
control system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control system
you may experience the following conditions:
•The stability and traction control light
flashes.
•Your vehicle slows down.
•Reduced engine power.
•A vibration in the brake pedal.
•The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
•If the driving condition is severe and your
foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal
may move as the systems applies higher
brake forces.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying
brakes to one or more of the wheels
individually and, if necessary, reducing
engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it
changes by applying the brakes to one or
more wheels individually.
190
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
Information Provided by:
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 188).
E72903
AA
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC®)
The system automatically activates when you
start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac with RSC
system cannot be completely turned off, but
the electronic stability control and roll
stability control portions of the system are
disabled when the transmission is in position
R. You can turn off the traction control
portion of the system independently. See
Using Traction Control (page 188).
191
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
Information Provided by:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations of
the system as contained in this section.
Sensing is only an aid for some (generally
large and fixed) objects when moving on a
flat surface at parking speeds. Certain
objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic
waves, surrounding vehicle's parking aid
systems, traffic control systems, fluorescent
lamps, inclement weather, air brakes, and
external motors and fans may also affect the
function of the sensing system; this may
include reduced performance or a false
activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
WARNINGS
This system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
The system is designed to provide a warning
to assist the driver in detecting large
stationary objects to avoid damaging your
vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the
ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create
false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 57).
Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear
sensing system may detect that add-on
device and therefore provide warnings. It is
suggested that you disable the rear sensing
system when you attach an add-on device
to your vehicle to prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through the
information display menu or from the pop-up
message that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 109).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 115).
192
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the
warning sounds continuously. If the system
detects a stationary or receding object
farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of
the bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an object
approaching, the warning sounds again.
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the
rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while the
transmission is in reverse (R) :
•Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
•Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or
less.
•Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from
the bumper.
FRONT PARKING AID
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P).
E187330
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. The coverage area
decreases at the outer corners.
When your vehicle approaches an object, a
warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the warning tone
repeat rate increases. The warning tone
sounds continuously when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the front bumper.
193
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the front
sensing system provides audio warnings
when your vehicle is moving and the
detected obstacle is stationary or moving
towards your vehicle.
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any other
forward gear (for example, low (L), sport (S)
or any forward gear in a manual
transmission), the front sensing system
provides audio warnings when your vehicle
is moving below a speed of 7 mph (12 km/h)
and an obstacle is located inside the
detection area.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNING
Designed to be a supplementary park
aid, this system may not work in all
conditions. This system cannot replace the
driver’s attention and judgment. The driver
is responsible for avoiding hazards and
maintaining a safe distance and speed, even
when the system is in use.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required.
The system detects an available parallel
parking space and automatically steers your
vehicle into the space (hands-free) while you
control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes.
The system visually and audibly instructs you
to park your vehicle.
The system may not function correctly if
something passes between the front bumper
and the parking space (a pedestrian or
cyclist) or if the edge of the neighboring
parked vehicle is high off the ground (for
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck).
Note: The blindspot information system does
not detect traffic alongside or behind your
vehicle during a park assist maneuver.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that cause
disruptive reflections.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves
or cause ultrasonic interference (motorcycle
exhaust, truck air brakes or horns).
Do not use the system if:
•You have attached a foreign object (bike
rack or trailer) to the front or rear of your
vehicle or attached close to the sensors.
•You have attached an overhanging
object (surfboard) to the roof.
•The front bumper or side sensors are
damaged or obstructed by a foreign
object (front bumper cover).
•A mini-spare tire is in use.
Using Active Park Assist
E146186
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
lever or the right side of the center
stack.
The touchscreen displays a message and a
corresponding graphic to indicate it is
searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator to indicate which side of
your vehicle you want the system to search.
Note: If the direction indicator is not on, the
system automatically searches on your
vehicle's passenger side.
194
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
A
E130107
When the system finds a suitable space, the
touchscreen displays a message and a tone
sounds. Slow down, continue moving forward
and stop when another tone sounds and a
message displays on the touchscreen (at
approximately position A), then follow the
instructions on the touchscreen.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times in the maneuver.
Note: Active park assist may not detect
vehicles with overhanging loads (a bus or a
truck), street furniture and other items. You
must make sure the selected space is
suitable for parking.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
4.9 ft (1.5 m) to the other vehicles while
passing a parking space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if the
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the touchscreen shows a message
to alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h), the system switches off and you
need to take full control of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into reverse
( R), with your hands off the wheel (and
nothing obstructing its movement), your
vehicle steers itself into the space. Indicated
by tones, instructions to move your vehicle
back and forth in the space, display on the
touchscreen.
195
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
E130108
When you think your vehicle has enough
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
solid tone from the parking aid (accompanied
by a touchscreen display message and a
chime), bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is finished, the
touch screen displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park assist
process is done. The driver is responsible
for checking the parking job and making any
necessary corrections before putting the
transmission in park (P).
Park Out Assist
E146186
While your vehicle is at rest in a
parallel parking space, press the
active park assist button.
The system displays a message requesting
an indication of direction. Use the direction
indicator to signal which side of your vehicle
you want to exit the parking space.
196
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
E188012
The system determines the clearance to the
front and rear of your vehicle and
automatically steers your vehicle out of a
parallel parking space (hands-free) while you
control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes.
The system visually and audibly guides you
to enter traffic.
After the system has directed your vehicle
past the adjacent vehicle or object, it guides
you to take control of the steering to
complete the exit from the parking spot.
Note: If the clearance in front of your vehicle
allows easy departure, the Park Out Assist
feature might not be available.
Note: You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle and making sure the path is
clear prior to pulling into traffic.
Note: This system is not intended to assist
in exiting perpendicular parking spaces,
damages to your vehicle may occur.
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
•Pressing the active park assist button.
•Grabbing the steering wheel.
•Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 10 seconds during an active
park search.
•Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
automatic steering.
•Turning off the traction control system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
•Traction control has activated on a
slippery or loose surface.
•There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
•Something touches the steering wheel.
197
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message is displayed, followed by
a tone. Occasional system messages may
occur in normal operation. For recurring or
frequent system faults, contact an authorized
dealer to have your vehicle serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off
The transmission is in reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered (for example, snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered sensors can affect the system's functionality
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space
The parking space is farther than 4.9 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 15.7 in (0.4 m) away
The transmission is in (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h)
198
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward when reverse [R] is selected)
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle properly
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly
You pulled your vehicle too far past the parking space. The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes)
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow, moving truck bed, etc.)
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash)
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that still
requires the driver to use it in conjunction
with the interior and exterior mirrors for
maximum coverage.
WARNINGS
Objects that are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper,
might not be seen on the screen due to the
limited coverage of the camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your reaction
time to stop your vehicle.
WARNINGS
Use caution when using the rear video
camera and the luggage compartment
door is ajar. If the luggage compartment door
is ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the luggage
compartment door is ajar.
199
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off. Make sure your
vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display
which represent your vehicle’s path and
proximity to objects behind your vehicle.
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what
is behind your vehicle when you place the
transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
•Active guidelines (if equipped): Show the
intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
•Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another object
behind you.
•Centerline: Helps align the center of your
vehicle with an object (for example, a
trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and
the luggage compartment door or liftgate is
open, no rear view camera features will
display.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly under
the following conditions:
•Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
•Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
•The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to become
misaligned.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
200
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
Note: Whenever the battery is disconnected
or a new battery installed, you need to drive
your vehicle a short distance and your speed
must exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) so the system
can recalibrate the steering angle data in
order to reactivate active guidelines.
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the
steering wheel to point the guidelines toward
an intended path. If you change the steering
wheel position while reversing, your vehicle
might deviate from the original intended
path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not display
when the steering wheel position is straight.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects
in the red zone are closest to your vehicle
and objects in the green zone are farther
away. Objects are getting closer to your
vehicle as they move from the green zone
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view
mirrors and rear view mirror to get better
coverage on both sides and rear of the
vehicle.
201
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full area
behind your vehicle may not show. Be
aware of your surroundings when using the
manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are Zoom
in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol in
the camera screen to change the view. The
default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only active
while the transmission is in reverse (R).
Camera System Settings
To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the multifunctional display when
the transmission is not in reverse (R):
Main Menu
Settings
Vehicle
Camera Settings
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when any of the sensing systems
detect an object.
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera delay
is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of reverse
(R) and into any gear other than park (P), the
camera image remains in the display until:
•Your vehicle speed sufficiently increases.
•You shift your vehicle into park (P).
202
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal. You can use cruise control when your
vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the road
surface is slippery. This could result in loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above the
set speed. The system will not apply the
brakes but a warning displays.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
E145976
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator changes color in the instrument
cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
•Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press and
release SET+.
•Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
•Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select kph as the display
measurement in the information display,
the set speed changes in approximately
2 kph increments. When you select mph
as the display measurement in the
information display, the set speed
changes in approximately 1 mph
increments.
203
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. You will
not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if you
switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch the ignition
off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to changing
road conditions, especially when using
adaptive cruise control. Adaptive cruise
control cannot replace attentive driving.
Failing to follow any of the warnings below
or failing to pay attention to the road may
result in a crash, serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
stationary or slow moving vehicles
below 6.2 mph (10 km/h).
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control
when entering or leaving a highway, in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
slippery or unpaved.
Do not use in poor visibility, specifically
fog, rain, spray or snow.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and control the vehicle at all
times.
The system adjusts your speed to maintain
a proper distance between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You
can select from one of four gap settings.
E145977
The controls for using your cruise control are
located on the steering wheel.
Switching the System On
Press and release ON.
E144529
The information display shows the
grey indicator light.
204
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
E164805
The current gap setting and SET also shows.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+. Memory stores
the vehicle speed.
3. The information display shows a green
indicator light, current gap setting and
desired set speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
E164805
5. A lead vehicle graphic illuminates if there
is a vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active,
the speedometer may vary slightly from the
set speed displayed in the information
display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle in front of
you, your vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does your vehicle
always decelerate quickly enough to avoid
a crash without driver intervention. Always
apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to
do so may result in a crash, serious injury or
death.
WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning or
a delayed warning. You should always apply
the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so
may result in a crash, serious injury or death.
Note: The brakes may emit a sound when
the adaptive cruise control system is active.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the
same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to
maintain a preset gap distance. The distance
setting is adjustable.
The system may provide slight temporary
acceleration when you use your driver side
directional indicator while following a lead
vehicle, to aid in passing the vehicle.
The lead vehicle graphic illuminates.
205
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
The vehicle maintains a constant distance
between the vehicle ahead until:
•The vehicle in front of you accelerates to
a speed above the set speed.
•The vehicle in front of you moves out of
your lane or out of view.
•The vehicle speed falls below 12.4 mph
(20 km/h).
•A new gap distance is set.
The system applies the brakes to slow the
vehicle to maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front. The system applies only
limited maximum braking. Press the brake
pedal to override the system.
If the system predicts that its maximum
braking level is insufficient, an audible
warning sounds while the system continues
to brake. A red warning bar appears on the
windshield heads up display. Take immediate
action to slow or stop the vehicle.
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
E145978
Gap decrease.A
Gap increase.B
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you by pressing the gap control.
E164805
The selected gap appears in the information
display as shown by the bars in the graphic.
Four gap distance settings are available.
206
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
Adaptive cruise control, distance between vehicle settings
Dynamic behaviorDistance gapTime gap, secondsGraphic display, bars indic-
ated between vehicles
Set speed
yd (m)mph ( km/h)
Sport.31 (28)1162 (100)
Normal.43 (39)1.4262 (100)
Normal.55 (50)1.8362 (100)
Comfort.67 (61)2.2462 (100)
Each time you start the vehicle, the system
selects the last chosen gap for the current
driver.
Disengaging the System
Press the brake pedal or press CNCL. The
last set speed displays in grey but does not
erase.
Overriding the System
WARNING
Whenever you press the accelerator
pedal and override the system, the
system does not automatically apply the
brakes to maintain separation from any
vehicle ahead.
While you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
E144529
When you override the system, the
green indicator light illuminates
and the lead vehicle graphic does
not show in the information display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower
speed if following a slower vehicle.
207
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
Changing the Set Speed
•Press and release SET+ or SET-. The set
speed changes in 5 mph (5 km/h)
increments.
•Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press and
release SET+.
•Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press the brake pedal or press and release
CNCL. The last set speed displays with a
strikethrough.
Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Press and release RES. The vehicle returns
to the previously set speed. The set speed
shows continuously in the information display
while the system is active.
Automatic Cancellation
The system does not operate below 12 mph
(20 km/h). An audible warning sounds and
the automatic braking releases if the vehicle
drops below this speed.
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
•The tires lose traction.
•The engine speed is too low.
•You apply the parking brake.
Note: If the engine speed drops too low, the
information display indicates low engine
speed. Shift to a lower gear (manual
transmission only) to avoid automatic
cancellation.
Hilly Condition Usage
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for an
extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again when the brakes have
cooled.
You should select a lower gear when the
system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep grades,
for example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent it
from overheating.
Switching the System Off
Note: The set speed memory erases when
you switch off the system.
Press and release OFF or turn off the ignition.
208
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
Detection Issues
WARNING
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges, tunnels
and safety barriers. In these cases, the
system may brake late or unexpectedly. At
all times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required.
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a
vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not
illuminate if the system does not detect a
vehicle in front of you.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front when
driving into and coming out of a
bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. You should stay alert and take
action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detections. See an authorized
dealer to have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
209
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
•A blocked sensor.
•High brake temperature.
•A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
WARNINGS
Do not use the system when towing a
trailer with aftermarked trailer brake
controls. Aftermarket trailer brakes do not
function properly when you switch the
system on because the brakes are
electronically controlled. Failing to do so may
result in loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can affect
the normal operation of the system. Failing
to do so may result in a loss of vehicle
control, which could result in serious injury.
E145632
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The sensor
is located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. The system cannot detect
a vehicle ahead and do not function when
something obstructs the radar signals. The
following table lists possible causes and
actions for this message displaying.
210
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some
way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that it is free from obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains
in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control.You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no
roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
possible to get a blockage warning and not
be blocked. This can happen, for example,
when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition
either self clears or clears after a key cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control does not brake
due to slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected and
apply the brakes when necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
211
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting does
not display, the system does not
automatically respond to lead vehicles and
automatic braking is not active. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
212
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING
The driver alert system is designed to
aid you. It is not intended to replace
your attention and judgment. You are still
responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system will store the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system will
be active at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
When below the activation speed, the
information display will inform you that the
system is unavailable.
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility
conditions.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using a
chime and a message in the information
display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off through
the information display by selecting Settings
then Driver Assist then Driver Alert in the
menu. When activated, the system will
monitor your alertness level based upon your
driving behavior in relation to the lane
markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system is in two stages. At first
the system issues a temporary warning that
you need to take a rest. This message will
only appear for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving alertness,
another warning may be issued which will
remain in the information display for a longer
time. Press OK on the steering wheel control
to clear the warning
System Display
When active the system will run automatically
in the background and only issue a warning
if required. You can view the status at any
time using the information display. See
General Information (page 109).
The alertness level is shown by six steps in
a colored bar.
E131358
213
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
The current assessment of your alertness is
within a typical range.
E131359
The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.
The status bar will travel from left to right as
the calculated alertness level decreases. As
the rest icon is approached the color turns
from green to yellow to red. The yellow
position indicates the first warning is active
and the red position indicates the second
warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning; you should consider resting, even
if the current assessment is with the typical
range.
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph (64
km/h), the alertness level will change to grey
for a short time and the information display
will inform you that the system is unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
•Switching the ignition off and on.
•Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace the
driver’s attention and judgment. The driver
is still responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system works above 40 mph (64
km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short period,
the system will alert you to put your hands
on the steering wheel. The system may
detect a light grip or touch on the steering
wheel as hands off driving.
The system detects unintentional drifting
toward the outside of the lane and alerts or
aids you to stay in the lane through the
steering system and instrument cluster
display. The system automatically detects
and tracks the road lane markings using a
camera mounted behind the interior rear
view mirror.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey®
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey®,
it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert.
214
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
Note: If a MyKey® is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system. You can only change the mode
and intensity settings.
E144813
Press the button located on the left
steering wheel stalk to switch the
system on or off.
System Settings
The system has two optional setting menus
available. To view or adjust them, select
Settings > Driver Assist > Lane Keeping Sys
in the information display using the OK
button on the steering wheel. The system
stores the last known selection for each of
these settings. You do not need to readjust
your settings each time you turn on the
system.
Mode: This setting allows you to select which
of the system features to enable.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
E165516
Aid only – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center when
the system detects an unintended lane
departure.
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center. If your
vehicle continues drifting out of the lane, the
system will provide a steering wheel
vibration.
215
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not indicate
the exact zone coverage area.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity of
the steering wheel vibration used for the alert
and alert + aid modes. This setting is not valid
for the aid mode.
•Low
•Medium
•High
System Display
E151660
When you turn the system on, an overhead
graphic of a vehicle with lane markings will
display in the information display. If you turn
the system on and select aid mode, arrows
will display along with the lane markings.
When you turn the system off, the lane
marking graphics will not display.
Note: If adaptive cruise control is enabled
the overhead vehicle graphic may still be
displayed.
While the system is on, the color of the lane
markings will change to indicate the system
status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily
unable to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side(s). This may be
because:
•Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
•Your turn indicator is active.
•Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
•The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
•The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain, fog),
traffic conditions (following a large
vehicle that is blocking or shadowing the
lane), or vehicle conditions (poor
headlamp illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is available
or ready to provide a warning or intervention,
on the indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping aid
intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
You can temporarily disable the system at
any time by doing the following:
•Quick braking.
•Fast acceleration.
216
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
•Using the turn signal indicator. •Evasive steering maneuver.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
Previous feature activation happened within the last one second
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
217
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been modified
218
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder
before changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Information System is not a replacement for
careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m)
beyond the bumper. The system is designed
to alert you if certain vehicles enter the blind
spot zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through
the blind spot zone, typically fewer than two
seconds, the system does not trigger.
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns on
when you start the engine and you drive your
vehicle forward above 5 mph (8 km/h).
For automatic transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System remains on while the
transmission is in drive (D). If shifted into
reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot Information
System turns back on when you drive your
vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h).
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears except
the reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
219
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle the
approaching vehicle is coming from. When
the Blind Spot Information System is alerting
on a vehicle and the corresponding turn
signal is ON, the Blind Spot Information
System alert indicator flashes as an
increased warning level.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
Note: The alert indicator flashes in case of
an alert and the turn signal is set to that side
at the same time.
System Sensor Blockage
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder
before changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Information System is not a replacement for
careful driving.
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snow
in front of the sensors and/or driving in heavy
rain can cause system degradation. Also,
other types of obstructions in front of the
sensor can cause system degradation. This
is referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the
information display. Also the BLIS alert
indicators will remain ON and BLIS will no
longer provide any vehicle warnings. You
can clear the information display warning but
the alert indicators will remain illuminated.
220
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in two
ways:
•After the blockage in front of the sensors
is removed or the rainfall/snowfall rate
decreases or stops, drive for a few
minutes in traffic to allow the sensors to
detect passing vehicles.
•By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Blind Spot Information
System off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but
no factory equipped trailer tow module, it is
recommended to turn the Blind Spot
Information System off manually. Operating
the Blind Spot Information System with a
trailer attached will cause poor system
performance.
System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the left
or right sensor, the telltale will illuminate and
a message will appear in the information
display. See Information Messages (page
115).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the information
display. See General Information (page 109).
When the Blind Spot Information System
switches off, you will not receive alerts and
the information display shows a system off
message. The telltale in the cluster also
illuminates. When you switch the Blind Spot
Information System on or off, the alert
indicators flash twice.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
remembers the last selected on or off setting.
You can also have the Blind Spot Information
System switched off permanently at an
authorized dealer. Once switched off
permanently, the system can only be
switched back on at an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the Cross Traffic Alert system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross Traffic
Alert turns off.
Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions while
your transmission is in reverse (R).
221
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detect
vehicles that approach with a speed up to
37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases when
the sensors are partially, mostly or fully
obstructed. Reversing slowly helps increase
the coverage area and effectiveness.
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
222
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is
mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that
side is severely limited.
223
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts
E142442
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an amber
alert indicator in the outside mirror on the
side of your vehicle the approaching vehicle
is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert also
sounds an audible alert and a message
appears in the information display indicating
a vehicle is coming from the right or left.
Cross Traffic Alert works with the reverse
sensing system that sounds its own series
of tones. See Rear Parking Aid (page 193).
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow
or bumper stickers to obstruct these areas,
this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 219). If the Blind Spot
Information System is blocked, Cross Traffic
Alert is also blocked. A corresponding
message appears in the information display
as soon as you shift the transmission into
reverse (R).
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather conditions
or debris build-up on the sensor area may
limit vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:
•Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
•Approaching vehicles passing at speeds
greater than 37 mph (60 km/h).
224
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
•Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
•Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Cross Traffic Alert off.
If your vehicle has a tow bar but no factory
equipped trailer tow module, it is
recommended to turn the Cross Traffic Alert
off manually. Operating Cross Traffic Alert
with a trailer attached will cause poor Cross
Traffic Alert performance.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor a message will appear
in the information display. See Information
Messages (page 115).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic Alert
off in the information display. See General
Information (page 109). When you switch
Cross Traffic Alert off, you will not receive
alerts and the information display will display
a system off message.
Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on and
ready to provide appropriate alerts when
the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
selected on or off setting.
You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off permanently, the
system can only be switched back on at an
authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system has
diagnostic checks that continuously
monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a
message displays in the information display.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10
seconds, switch the ignition on and watch
the information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If the system detects an error, you may
not feel a difference in the steering,
however a serious condition may exist.
Obtain immediate service from an authorized
dealer, failure to do so may result in loss of
steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
225
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to the
steering system. You do not lose the ability
to steer your vehicle manually. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers allow the
system to cool and return to normal
operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•Correct tire pressures.
•Uneven tire wear.
•Loose or worn suspension components.
•Loose or worn steering components.
•Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with the
brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and accident avoidance
systems. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
you must drive your vehicle a short distance
before the system relearns the strategy and
reactivates all systems.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
Principle Of Operation (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
This system is an extra driving aid. It
does not replace your attention and
judgment, or the need to apply the brakes.
This system does NOT automatically brake
your vehicle. If you fail to press the brake
pedal when necessary, you may collide with
another vehicle.
The collision warning system with
brake support cannot help prevent all
collisions. Do not rely on this system to
replace your judgment and the need to
maintain correct distance and speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of your vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).
226
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
E156130
The system alerts you of certain collision
risks. The system's sensor detects your
vehicle's rapid approach to other vehicles
traveling in the same direction as your
vehicle.
E156131
When your vehicle rapidly approaches
another vehicle, a red warning light flashes
and a tone sounds.
The brake support system assists you in
reducing any collision speed by pre-charging
the brakes. If the risk of collision continues
to increases after the audio-visual warning,
the brake support prepares the brake system
for rapid braking. The system does not
automatically activate the brakes, but if the
brake pedal is pressed even lightly, the
brakes apply full stopping power.
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support reduces collision speed only
if you brake your vehicle before any collision.
As in any typical braking situation, you must
press your brake pedal.
You can use your information display control
to adjust the warning system's sensitivity to
any one of three possible settings. See
General Information (page 109).
Note: When possible, the manufacturer
recommends using the highest sensitivity
setting. If warnings are too frequent, you can
reduce your system's sensitivity. Reduced
sensitivity causes fewer and later system
warnings. See General Information (page
109).
Blocked Sensors
E145632
If a blocked sensor message appears in the
information display, dirt, water, or an object
is blocking the sensor. The sensor is located
behind a cover near the driver side of the
lower grille. If anything blocks the sensor,
your vehicle cannot see through the sensor,
and the collision warning system will not
work. Possible causes for the blocked sensor
message and corrective actions are listed
below.
227
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
ActionCause
Clean the radar sensor cover or remove the obstructionThe radar sensor cover in the grille is dirty or obstructed
Wait a short time. The radar may take several minutes to reset after
you remove the obstruction
The surface of the radar sensor cover is clean but the message
remains in the display
The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Shortly after
weather conditions improve, the collision warning system automatically
reactivates
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the air interferes with the radar
signals
The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Shortly after
weather conditions improve, the collision warning system automatically
reactivates
Swirling water, snow or ice on the road surface interferes with the
radar signals
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support only reduces collision speed
if you first apply your brakes. You must brake
as you would in any typical braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology, there
may be certain instances where vehicles do
not provide a collision warning. These
include:
•Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
•Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
•Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
•Severe weather conditions (see blocked
sensor section).
•Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor section).
•Small distance to vehicle ahead.
•Large steering wheel and pedal
movements (very active driving style).
Damage to the front end of the vehicle may
alter the radar sensor's coverage area. This
may result in missed or false collision
warnings. Have an authorized dealer check
your radar sensor for proper coverage and
operation.
228
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
DRIVE CONTROL (If Equipped)
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL
Lincoln Drive Control delivers the Lincoln
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering, handling,
powertrain response and sound. You can
preset your preferences for these systems
within the information display. Lincoln Drive
Control will respond to your preferences
based on what gear position you select. This
provides a single location to control multiple
systems performance settings.
Lincoln Drive Control consists of the
following systems:
•Continuously controlled damping
dynamically adjusts the shock absorbers
stiffness in real time to match the road
surface and driver inputs. This system
continuously monitors your vehicle’s
motion (roll, pitch, bounce), suspension
position, load, speed, road conditions,
and steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
•Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based on
your vehicle speed and your inputs.
•Adaptive steering optimizes your
vehicle's steering response based on
your steering wheel input, changes in
vehicle speed and other conditions.
•Active noise control utilizes your vehicle
electronics to enhance the acoustic
experience.
•Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control in
adverse conditions or high performance
driving.
•Electronic throttle control enhances the
powertrain response to your inputs.
Using Lincoln Drive Control
You can configure which of the Drive Control
modes are active when your vehicle is in
drive (D) or in Sport (S). The configuration
remains active until modified from the main
menu on the information display.
229
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
These systems have a range of modes which
you can choose from in order to customize
your ideal driving experience:
•Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing comfort.
Your steering effort decreases and the
suspension movement is more fluid.
Comfort mode is ideal when you desire
enhanced traveling comfort.
•Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the composure
demanded from a luxury vehicle.
•Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens, with
an emphasis on handling and control.
The engine responds more directly to
your inputs and takes on a more powerful
tone. Sport mode is ideal for use during
more spirited driving.
You can change your vehicle’s Drive
Control settings from the main menu on
the information display:
Settings
Drive ControlVehicle
Note: Not all settings may be available.
Note: Lincoln Drive Control has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system
to ensure proper operation. Certain types of
system errors will gray out the mode
selections within the information display,
preventing you from changing states when
the gear position is changed. Other types of
errors will produce a temporary message
that states Drive Control Malfunction. If either
condition persists for multiple key cycles,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
230
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE
Cargo Management System (If Equipped)
E142445
The system is located in the floor of the
cargo area. Lift the handle to open.
LUGGAGE COVERS
WARNINGS
Make sure that the posts are properly
latched in mounting features. The
cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or
accident if it is not securely installed.
WARNINGS
Do not place any objects on the cargo
area shade. They may obstruct your
vision or strike occupants of your vehicle in
a sudden stop or crash.
Use the cargo shade to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
E142447
Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the
mounting features located behind the rear
seat on the rear trim panels to install the
cargo shade.
To operate the cargo shade:
1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade
rearward.
2. Secure both ends of the support rod into
the retention slots located on the rear
quarter trim panels.
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING
When loading the roof racks, we
recommend you evenly distribute the
load, as well as maintain a low center of
gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers
of gravity, may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
231
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
The maximum recommended load is 50 lb
(22 kg) for vehicles with a panoramic roof,
and 80 lb (36 kg) for vehicles without a
panoramic roof. For vehicles with
Continuously Controlled Damping
suspension, the maximum recommended
load is 80 lb (36 kg), regardless of roof type.
Evenly distribute the load on the roof rack.
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The intended design of the roof panel
is not to directly carry a load.
Make sure that you securely fasten the load.
Check the tightness of the load before
driving and at each fuel stop.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, trailer or both,
to keep your loaded vehicle weight
within its design rating capability, with
or without a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum return of
vehicle design performance. Before
loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or
without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire
Label or Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight of the
vehicle including a full tank of fuel and
all standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the weight of
your new vehicle when you picked it up
from your authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
232
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
Payload - is the combined weight of
cargo and passengers that the vehicle
is carrying. The maximum payload for
your vehicle can be found on the Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED
WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR
XXX lb.” for maximum payload. The
payload listed on the Tire Label is the
maximum payload for the vehicle as built
by the assembly plant. If you install any
aftermarket or authorized-dealer
installed equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed on
the Tire Label in order to determine the
new payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading capacity
of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
Example only:
E210944
E210945
233
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
E143817
CARGO
Cargo Weight - includes all weight
added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment.
When towing, trailer tongue load or king
pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is the total
weight placed on each axle (front and
rear) including vehicle curb weight and
all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - is
the maximum allowable weight that can
be carried by a single axle (front or rear).
These numbers are shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position. The
total load on each axle must never
exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
available at an authorized dealer.
234
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
E143818
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - is the
Vehicle Curb Weight, plus cargo, plus
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
- is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). It is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position. The
Gross Vehicle Weight must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating.
235
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
Example only:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety Compliance
Certification Label vehicle weight
rating limits could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance, engine,
transmission and/or structural damage,
serious damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
236
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
E143819
GCW GVW
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) - is the
Gross Vehicle Weight plus the weight of
the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded
trailer, including all cargo and
passengers, that the vehicle can handle
without risking damage. (Important: The
towing vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight
Rating.) Separate functional brakes
should be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the Gross
Combined Weight of the towing vehicle
plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must never
exceed the Gross Combined Weight
Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight - is
the highest possible weight of a fully
loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It
assumes a vehicle with mandatory
options, driver and front passenger
weight (150 pounds [68 kilograms] each),
no cargo weight (internal or external)
and a tongue load of 10–15%
(conventional trailer) or king pin weight
of 15–25% (fifth wheel trailer). Consult
an authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at an
authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin
Weight - refers to the amount of the
weight that a trailer pushes down on a
trailer hitch.
237
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
Examples: For a 5000 pound (2268
kilogram) conventional trailer, multiply
5000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper
tongue load range of 500 to 750 pounds
(227 to 340 kilograms). For an 11500
pound (5216 kilogram) fifth wheel trailer,
multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a
proper king pin load range of 1725 to
2875 pounds (782 to 1304 kilograms).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with
lower load carrying capacities than
the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not
increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or
personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load
limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lb." on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb.
and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples
on how to calculate the available amount
of cargo and luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is
there enough load capacity to carry you,
four of your friends and all the golf bags?
You and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf
bags weigh approximately 30 pounds
(13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation
would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) =
238
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you
have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and your
golf bags. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99
kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 -
495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends
decide to pick up cement from the local
home improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for the
past two years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded
down, you have room for twelve
100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of
cement. Do you have enough load
capacity to transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 pounds (99 kilograms), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240
pounds. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much
weight. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 -
198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least
240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load calculation
would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In metric
units, the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45
kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32
kilograms.
The above calculations also assume that
the loads are positioned in your vehicle
in a manner that does not overload the
Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating specified for your vehicle on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating position.
Special Loading Instructions for
Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-
type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles.
Extra precautions, such as slower
speeds and increased stopping
distance, should be taken when driving
a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and
people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and
placement of the load, hauling cargo
and people may raise the center of
gravity of the vehicle.
239
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the certification
label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended gross
trailer weight exceeds the limit of the
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Your vehicle may have electrical items,
such as fuses or relays, related to
towing. See the Fuses chapter.
Your vehicle's load capacity designation
is by weight, not by volume, so you
cannot necessarily use all available
space when loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra load on
your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect
these components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement
affects your vehicle when driving:
•Load the heaviest items closest to
the trailer floor.
•Load the heaviest items centered
between the left and right side trailer
tires.
•Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not
allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
•Select a tow bar with the correct rise
or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the
trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may
be present due to the increased payload
weight. Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing is located in
another chapter of this manual. See
Load Limit (page 232).
You can also find information in the RV
& Trailer Towing Guide available at your
authorized dealer, or online.
240
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Information Provided by:
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford does
not recommend disabling this feature except
in situations where speed reduction may be
detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver
has significant trailer towing experience, and
can control trailer sway and maintain safe
operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it when it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine torque
to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer begins
to sway, the stability control warning lamp
flashes and a message appears in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 115). Slow your vehicle
down, pull safely to the side of the road and
check for correct load distribution.
You can switch this feature off in the
information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
on.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight for
your vehicle configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Be sure to take into consideration
trailer frontal area. Do not exceed 20 feet2
(1.86 meters2) if your vehicle is not equipped
with a towing package or 30 feet2 (2.79
meters2) if your vehicle is equipped with a
towing package.
Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the
gross combined weight by 2% per 1,000 ft
(300 m) starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)
elevation point.
241
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Information Provided by:
Note: Certain states require electric trailer
brakes for trailers over a specified weight.
Be sure to check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum trailer
weights listed may be limited to this specified
weight, as the vehicle’s electrical system
may not include the wiring connector needed
to activate electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided the
maximum trailer weight is less than or equal
to the maximum trailer weight listed for your
vehicle configuration on the following chart.
Maximum trailer weight1
Maximum GCWRPowertrain
2000 lb (907 kg)6220 lb (2821 kg)
2.0L GTDI FWD2
2000 lb (907 kg)6400 lb (2903 kg)
2.0L GTDI AWD2
2000 lb (907 kg)6420 lb (2912 kg)
2.3L GTDI AWD2
3000 lb (1361 kg)7220 lb (3275 kg)
2.0L GTDI FWD3
242
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Information Provided by:
Maximum trailer weight1
Maximum GCWRPowertrain
3000 lb (1361 kg)7400 lb (3357 kg)
2.0L GTDI AWD3
3000 lb (1361 kg)7420 lb (3366 kg)
2.3L GTDI AWD3
1Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
2Without trailer towing package.
3With trailer towing package.
243
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Information Provided by:
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
•Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
•Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
•See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation
and adjustment specifications.
•Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
•If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's load
in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 232).
Remember to account for the trailer tongue
weight as part of your vehicle load when
calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Weight-distributing Hitches
WARNING
Do not adjust a weight-distributing
hitch to any position where the rear
bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was
before attaching the trailer. Doing so will
defeat the function of the weight-distributing
hitch, which may cause unpredictable
handling, and could result in serious personal
injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the height
of your vehicle's front wheel opening on
the fender is approximately half the way
down from H2, toward H1.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
When the trailer is level or slightly nose down
toward the vehicle:
•Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
•Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
•Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
244
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Information Provided by:
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook
retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross
them under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your vehicle's
brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of
having a collision greatly increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are
required for safe control of towed vehicles
and trailers weighing more than 1500
pounds (680 kilograms) when loaded.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system resulting
in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible for assistance in proper
trailer tow wiring installation. Additional
electrical equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to
get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip. When
turning, make wider turns so the trailer
wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
•Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
•Do not make full-throttle starts.
•Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
•When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
•Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control
may turn off automatically when you are
towing on long, steep grades.
245
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Information Provided by:
•Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
•If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and transmission
cooling.
•Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
•Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of
the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included
with vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
•Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
•Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 inches (15 centimeters) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
•Causing internal damage to the
components.
•Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the
rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear axle
lubricant, which is not normally checked or
changed unless a leak is suspected or other
axle repair is required.
246
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Information Provided by:
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or, if
you are a member of a roadside assistance
program, your roadside assistance service
provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt
towing procedure. Vehicle damage may
occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other
means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck operators.
Have your tow truck operator refer to this
manual for proper hook-up and towing
procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front
wheels off the ground. When towing in this
manner, the rear wheels can remain on the
ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage
to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, all-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS
Emergency Towing
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being towed.
247
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Information Provided by:
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without
access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer,
or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground,
regardless of the powertrain and
transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
•Your vehicle is facing forward for towing
in a forward direction.
•You place the vehicle in Stay in Neutral
mode. See Placing Your Vehicle in Stay
in Neutral Mode. In addition, make sure
to read the brake-shift interlock override
procedure. See Automatic Transmission
(page 172).
•Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
•Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Placing Your Vehicle in Stay in Neutral
Mode
1. Press the N button on the shifter
assembly.
2. When Press N again to Enter Stay in
Neutral Mode appears in the information
display, press the N button again.
Note: The message Stay in Neutral Mode
Engaged appears in the information display
when you successfully complete the
procedure.
Note: Keeping the vehicle in Stay in Neutral
mode eventually causes your vehicle battery
to lose charge. Exit the mode as soon as
safely possible.
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 133).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example of
recreational towing would be towing your
vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed
these guidelines to prevent damage to your
transmission.
Front-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
You must place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by the
equipment provider.
All-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground), as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
all four (4) wheels off the ground such as
when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise,
you cannot recreational tow your vehicle.
248
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Information Provided by:
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers).
During this time, your vehicle may exhibit
some unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the gears
early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the conditions
you drive under, and how you maintain your
vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
•Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
•Drive at steady speeds without stopping.
•Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
•Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
•Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
•Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at
55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less fuel than
traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
•Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
•Use the recommended engine oil.
•Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
•Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
•Revving the engine before turning it off.
•Idle for periods longer than one minute.
•Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings.
•Use the air conditioner or front defroster.
•Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
•Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
•Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
•Carry unnecessary weight (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb
[180 kilogram] of weight carried).
•Driving with the wheels out of alignment.
Conditions
•Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
•Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce fuel
economy.
•To maximize the fuel economy, drive with
the tonneau cover installed (if equipped).
•Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 8–10 miles
(12–16 kilometers) of driving.
249
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
Information Provided by:
•Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel
economy as compared to driving on hilly
terrain.
•Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top cruise
gear and with steady pressure on the gas
pedal.
•Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped)
is less fuel efficient than two-wheel-drive
operation.
•Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the front rocker
area of your vehicle.
E176360
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
•Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
•Check that the horn works.
•Check that the exterior lights work.
•Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the
pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor mats
that are firmly secured to retention posts so
that they cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
Always make sure that the floor mats
are properly attached to the retention
posts in the carpet that are supplied with
your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly
secured to both retention posts to make sure
mats do not shift out of position.
250
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to prevent them
from moving and interfering with the pedals
or the ability to control the vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on
top of vehicle carpeting surface and not
another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Check attachment of floor mats on a
regular basis. Always properly reinstall
and secure floor mats that have been
removed for cleaning or replacement.
Always make sure that objects cannot
fall into the driver foot well while the
vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can
become trapped under the pedals causing
a loss of vehicle control.
WARNINGS
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment instructions
can potentially cause interference with pedal
operation causing a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
251
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
Information Provided by:
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold In the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
If you ever need help on the road, the Lincoln
Motor Company is there for you with
nationwide, 24-hours-a-day,
seven-days-a-week assistance.
The service is available:
•Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
•For six years or 70,000 mi
(112,654.08 km) (whichever comes first)
within the extended powertrain warranty
coverage period for subsequent owners.
•For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
This complimentary Roadside Assistance
program is separate from the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and includes:
•A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
•Battery jump start.
•Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility).
•Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2.0 gal (7.5 L) of gasoline or 5.0 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
•Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.48 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
•Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 100 mi (161 km) of
the disablement location or to the nearest
Lincoln dealer. If a client requests a tow
to a selling or preferred dealer that is
more than 100 mi (161 km) from the
disablement location, the client shall be
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 100 mi (161 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
coverage for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is not,
then the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles Sold In the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States Lincoln vehicle clients who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-521-4140.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company will
reimburse a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest Lincoln dealership within
100 mi (161 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Lincoln vehicle
clients, call 1-800-521-4140. Ford Motor
Company will ask you to submit your original
receipts.
252
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Information Provided by:
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
Canadian clients who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-387-9333.
Sykes Assistance Services Corporation
administers the Roadside Assistance
program. You must receive covered services
in Canada or the continental United States.
Coverage extends to vehicles that use public,
non-seasonal, annually traveled roadways.
Roadside Assistance coverage does not
extend to vehicles involved in cross-country
driving, logging, autocross and any other
form of off-road use. Well maintained roads
and surfaces help ensure safe travel for the
Supplier, and allow their representatives to
perform service as per the standard
operating procedures.
In Remote Locations
If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by
road to the nearest authorized dealership,
transportation by rail or water may be
necessary. The program covers a tow to the
dock or rail terminal and also to the
dealership at the end of the trip.
For rail or water transportation, however,
contact your authorized dealer to confirm if
you are eligible for additional coverage
before you authorize or pay for the service.
Call Lincoln Roadside Assistance at
1-800-387-9333 for additional information.
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the United States coverage.
Please refer to your warranty information or
visit our website at www.lincolncanada.com
for information on Canadian services and
benefits.
Canadian clients who need to obtain
roadside information, call 1-800-387-9333 or
visit our website at www.lincolncanada.com.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not running,
the battery will lose charge. There may be
insufficient power to restart your vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
•Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and rear
direction indicators will flash.
•Press the button again to turn them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the
fuel system be inspected by an authorized
dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel to
the engine. Not every impact will cause a
shutoff.
253
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Information Provided by:
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision,
you may restart your vehicle. For vehicles
equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to switch
off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the engine
by pressing the brake pedal and the
START/STOP button, or switch on the
ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without pressing
the brake pedal. Both ways re-enable the
fuel system.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does not
restart after your third attempt, contact an
authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
The gases around the battery can
explode if exposed to flames, sparks,
or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in
personal injury or vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which
can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if
contacted.
Use only an adequate-sized cable with
insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle's electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch. Turn all accessories
off.
254
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Information Provided by:
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components as
grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts.
To avoid reverse polarity connections, make
sure that you correctly identify the positive
(+) and negative (-) terminals on both the
disabled and booster vehicles before
connecting the cables. Battery positions may
vary.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the assisting
battery.
E152134
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) cable to an exposed metal part of the
stalled vehicle's engine, or connect the
negative (-) cable to the ground
connection point, if available.
255
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Information Provided by:
WARNING
Do not connect the end of the second
cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the
battery.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
rpms, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. After starting the disabled vehicle, run
both vehicle engines for an additional
three minutes before disconnecting the
jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the jumper cable from the
ground metal surface or connecting
point, if available.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle's battery.
After starting your disabled vehicle and
removing the jumper cables, allow your
vehicle to idle for several minutes so the
battery can recharge.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
256
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Information Provided by:
The horn and indicators will turn off when:
•You press the hazard control button.
•You press the panic button on the remote
entry transmitter (if equipped).
•Your vehicle runs out of power.
257
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Information Provided by:
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair needed,
you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to
the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made
using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center or use the online
resources listed below to find the nearest
authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are
available online at www.lincolnowner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
•U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State, or Zip Code
•Owner Manuals
•Maintenance Schedules
•Recalls
•Ford Extended Service Plans
•Ford Genuine Accessories
•Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.ford.ca
Twitter English
@LincolnMotorCA
258
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Information Provided by:
Twitter French
@LincolnQC
Instagram
@LincolnMotorCA
Facebook
/LincolnMotorCA
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are receiving,
follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling/servicing
authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies, please
contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
•Vehicle Identification Number.
•Your telephone number (home and
business).
•The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
•The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify Ford
in writing before pursuing remedies under
your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must
be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by
state law, before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by certain
state laws. This dispute handling procedure
is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are
independent of the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act or state replacement or
repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable
express warranty after a reasonable number
of attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle with
one substantially identical or repurchase the
vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an
amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable
allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive
a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had a
reasonable number of attempts to conform
the vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18 months of
ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000
miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
259
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Information Provided by:
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect or
condition that substantially impairs the
use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of
nonconformities for a total of more than
30 calendar days (not necessarily all at
one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the need
for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred by
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You
are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE
before exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If
you choose to seek redress by pursuing
rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB
AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
(BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S.
ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the claim.
If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you
may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the
hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may
reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line
dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept
the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then
bound by the decision, and must comply with
the decision within 30 days of receipt of your
acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application. You
will be asked for your name and address,
general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try
260
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Information Provided by:
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that will need to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
will review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where you
continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve
a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
261
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Information Provided by:
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than
is recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without
proper conversion may damage the
effectiveness of your emission control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor Company or
Ford of Canada is not responsible for any
damage caused by use of improper fuel.
Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the United
States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth
of the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI),
America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands,
please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number:
(800) 841-FORD (3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia:
8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
262
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Information Provided by:
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate to any of the above locations,
register your vehicle identification number
(VIN) and new address with Ford Motor
Company Export Operations & Global Growth
Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. In the event
your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your
concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager. If you require additional assistance
or clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as previously
listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S
LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by
their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by
credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, Incorporated using the contact
information listed previously in this section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford
Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
Ford Motor Company.
263
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Information Provided by:
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Transport Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htmWebsite
1–800–333–0510Phone
264
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Information Provided by:
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Pre-Fuse Box
The pre-fuse box is in the engine
compartment attached to the positive battery
post. This box contains several high current
fuses. If you need to replace one of these
high current fuses, see an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the power
distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses that
protect your vehicle's main electrical systems
from overloads.
You will need to reset some features if you
disconnect and reconnect the battery. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 294).
Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover
to remove it.
265
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
E157389
266
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Anti-lock brake system module.
50A2
F7
Anti-lock brake system module.
30A2
F8
Fuel pump relay.
20A2
F9
Blower motor relay.
40A2
F10
Run start relay.
30A2
F11
Powertrain control module relay.
40A2
F12
Starter relay.
30A2
F13
Memory seat.
30A2
F14
Wipers and washers relay.
30A2
F15
Cooling fan.
25A2
F16
Cooling fan 1 (without trailer tow).
40A2
F17
267
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Cooling fan 1 (with trailer tow).
50A2
Cooling fan 2 (without trailer tow).
40A2
F18
Cooling fan 2 (with trailer tow).
50A2
Anti-lock brake system module run/start.
5A1
F19
Horn relay.
20A1
F20
Brake pedal switch.
10A1
F21
Windshield wipers and washer.
25A1
F22
Run/start relay coil.
5A1
F23
Transmission range control module.
20A1
F24
Air conditioning clutch relay.
10A1
F25
Powertrain control module relay coil.
5A1
F26
Washer pump relay.
10A1
F27
268
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Alternator sensor.
10A1
F28
Rain sensor.
15A1
F29
Rear wiper.
Washer pump relay coil.
Left-hand headlamp.
20A1
F30
Right-hand headlamp.
20A1
F31
Vehicle power 1 (powertrain control module).
15A1
F32
Vehicle power 2 (canister vent solenoid, universal exhausted
gas oxygen sensor, variable camshaft timing, catalyst monitor
sensor, canister purge solenoid).
15A1
F33
Vehicle power 3 (A/C clutch control relay coil, variable A/C
compressor, fan control relay coil, engine charge air bypass
valve solenoid, active grill shutters).
15A1
F34
Vehicle power 4 (ignition coils).
15A1
F35
Not used.—F36
Not used.—F37
269
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Not used.—F38
Powertrain control ignition start power - run.
5A1
F39
Electronic power assist steering run/start.
10A1
F40
Not used.—F41
Adaptive cruise control.
10A1
F42
Blind spot information system.
Heads-up display.
Rear video camera.
Not used.—F43
Heated rear window relay coil.
5A1
F44
Heated wiper park.
Transmission range control module run/start.
5A1
F45
Heated rear window relay.
40A2
F46
Heated wiper park.
270
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Not used.—F47
Not used.—F48
1Mini fuse.
2J-case fuse.
Circuits switchedRelay
Run start.R1
Horn.R2
Fuel pump.R3
Rear window washer pump.R4
Cooling fan relay 3 (with trailer tow).R5
Windshield wipers.R6
Cooling fan relay 1 (without trailer tow).R7
Cooling fan relay 5 (with trailer tow).
Starter.R8
Not used.R9
271
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Circuits switchedRelay
Cooling fan relay 4 (with trailer tow).R10
Air conditioning clutch.R11
Cooling fan relay 1 (with trailer tow).R12
Cooling fan relay 3 (without trailer tow).
Cooling fan relay 2.R13
Powertrain control module.R14
Heated rear window.R15
Heated wiper park.
Blower motor.R16
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
The fuse panel is behind the lower end of
the glove box.
272
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
E145984
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Lighting (ambient, glove box, vanity, dome, cargo).
10A1
1
Memory seats.
7.5A1
2
Driver door unlock.
20A1
3
273
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Not used (spare).
5A1
4
Subwoofer amplifier.
20A1
5
THX amplifier.
Not used (spare).
10A2
6
Not used (spare).
10A2
7
Not used (spare).
10A2
8
Not used (spare).
10A2
9
Keypad.
5A2
10
Power liftgate logic.
Not used (spare).
5A2
11
Climate control.
7.5A2
12
Gear shift control.
Push-button ignition.
Cluster.
7.5A2
13
Datalink module logic.
Steering column module logic.
274
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Not used (spare).
10A2
14
Datalink module.
10A2
15
Not used (spare).
15A1
16
Cellphone passport module.
5A2
17
Not used (spare).
5A2
18
Not used (spare).
7.5A2
19
Not used (spare).
7.5A2
20
Humidity and in-car temperature.
5A2
21
Occupant classification sensor.
5A2
22
Delayed accessory (driver window switch, moonroof logic,
power inverter logic).
10A1
23
Central lock and unlock.
20A1
24
275
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Driver door (window, mirror).
30A1
25
Front passenger door (window, mirror).
30A1
26
Moonroof.
30A1
27
THX amplifier.
20A1
28
Rear driver side door (window).
30A1
29
Rear passenger side door (window).
30A1
30
Not used (spare).
15A1
31
Display.
10A1
32
GPS.
Radio frequency receiver.
Voice control.
Radio and active noise control.
20A1
33
Run/start bus (fuse #19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36, 37, circuit breaker).
30A1
34
276
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Restraints control module.
5A1
35
Auto-dimming rear view mirror.
15A1
36
Continuous control damping suspension.
Lane keeping system module.
Rear heated seats module.
All-wheel drive relay.
20A1
37
Heated steering wheel.
Not used (spare).30A38
1Micro fuse.
2Dual micro fuse.
Rear Cargo Fuse Box
The fuse panel is located in the cargo area
on the passenger side. Open the fuse panel
cover to gain access to the fuses.
277
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
E175700
278
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Not used.—F1
Not used.—F2
Hands-free liftgate module.
5A1
F3
Not used.—F4
Not used.—F5
Not used.—F6
Rear heated seats.
30A2
F7
Power cinch latch.
30A2
F8
Power liftgate.
Heated front seats.
20A2
F9
Trailer tow.
40A2
F10
Climate control seats.
30A2
F11
Auxiliary power point - instrument panel.
20A2
F12
Not used.—F13
279
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Power seats.
30A2
F14
Auxiliary power point - inside of floor console.
20A2
F15
Auxiliary power point - rear of floor console.
20A2
F16
Not used.—F17
Auxiliary power point - cargo area.
20A2
F18
Inverter power outlet.
40A2
F19
1Mini fuse.
2J-case fuse.
280
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating
can cause severe wire damage and could
start a fire.
E142430
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. A break
in the fuse wire will indicate a blown fuse.
Check the appropriate fuses before replacing
any electrical components.
281
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized
dealers that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide
scheduled maintenance information which
makes tracking routine service easy. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 367).
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
•Do not work on a hot engine.
•Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
•Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
•Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E142457
1. Inside your vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand side
of the instrument panel.
282
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E142458
2. Go to the front of your vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch.
3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold
it open.
4. To close the hood, lower the hood and
apply closing force as it drops the last 8
to 11 inches (20 to 30 centimeters).
283
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
A B C D E F
G
H
E171684
284
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Engine coolant reservoirA
Engine oil dipstickB
Engine oil filler capC
Brake fluid reservoirD
BatteryE
Power distribution boxF
Air filter assemblyG
Windshield washer fluid reservoirH
285
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
A B CD E F
G
H
E171685
286
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Engine coolant reservoirA
Engine oil dipstickB
Engine oil filler capC
Brake fluid reservoirD
BatteryE
Power distribution boxF
Air filter assemblyG
Windshield washer fluid reservoirH
287
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E170468
A B
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Check the oil level before starting the
engine, or switch the engine off and wait
15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean, lint free cloth. Replace the dipstick
and remove it again to check the oil level.
If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 342).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is between
the minimum and the maximum marks.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC),
comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
WARNINGS
Only add oil when the engine is cold.
If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes for
the engine to cool down.
288
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS
Do not remove the filler cap when the
engine is running.
1. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
2. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 342).
3. Wipe off any spilled oil.
4. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it
clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
Use the information display controls on the
steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK button
until the instrument cluster
displays the following
message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator
resets the instrument cluster
displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
Action and descriptionMessage
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the Engine Coolant
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned
if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
289
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam
and hot liquid can come out forcefully when
the cap is loosened slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant
or antifreeze or windshield washer fluid
outside of its specified function and vehicle
location.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. This damage would not be
covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
engine coolant may change color from
orange to pink or light red. As long as the
engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated,
this color change does not indicate the
engine coolant has degraded nor does it
require the engine coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the engine
coolant to be replaced.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine coolant
at the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 367).
Note: Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant
reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant
in this chapter.
The coolant concentration should be
maintained within 48% to 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -30°F
(-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant concentration
should be tested with a refractometer such
as Robinair® Coolant and Battery
Refractometer 75240. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentrations.
290
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Adding Engine Coolant
•Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the
correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling
system. The use of an improper coolant
may harm engine and cooling system
components and may void the warranty.
Use prediluted engine coolant meeting
the Ford specification. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 342).
•In case of emergency, a large amount of
water without engine coolant may be
added in order to reach a vehicle service
location. In this instance, the cooling
system must be drained, chemically
cleaned with Motorcraft Premium Cooling
System Flush, and refilled with engine
coolant as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause
engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
•Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or
any engine coolants mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
•Do not add extra inhibitors or additives
to the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the engine coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will
escape as you unscrew the cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the
Ford specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 342).
Whenever coolant has been added, the
coolant level in the coolant reservoir should
be checked the next few times you drive the
vehicle. If necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant level to
the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend
the use of recycled engine coolant since a
Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of
in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
•A coolant concentration of 60% will
provide improved freeze point protection.
Engine coolant concentrations above
60% will decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
291
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
•A coolant concentration of 40% will
provide improved overheat protection.
Engine coolant concentrations below
40% will decrease the freeze and
corrosion protection characteristics of
the engine coolant and may cause
engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this
feature allows the vehicle to be driven
temporarily before incremental component
damage is incurred. The “fail-safe” distance
depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle
load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to the
red (hot) area and:
A high engine temperature
message will appear in the
information display.
The service engine soon indicator
will light.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine will
automatically switch to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate.
However:
•The engine power will be limited.
•The air conditioning system will be
disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine
temperature and the engine will completely
shut down, causing steering and braking
effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the
engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have
limited power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may completely
shut down without warning, potentially losing
engine power, power steering assist, and
power brake assist, which may increase the
possibility of a crash resulting in serious
injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
292
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
You have limited engine power when in the
fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine will run rough. Remember that the
engine is capable of completely shutting
down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. Arrange for your vehicle to be taken to
an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period
for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if
low.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repairing
the engine problem increases the chance of
engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
The automatic transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level
should be checked if the transmission is not
working properly, for example if the
transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked
by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid
should be added by an authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines
are within the normal operating range; there
is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating range, the
performance of the system could be
compromised; seek service from your
authorized dealer immediately.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the
risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
293
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 342).
State or local regulations on volatile organic
compounds may restrict the use of methanol,
a common windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be
used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or
lighted substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always shield
your face and protect your eyes. Always
provide proper ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the vent
caps, resulting in personal injury and damage
to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with
a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield
your eyes when working near the battery to
protect against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft®
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water during its
life of service.
Note: If your battery has a cover or shield,
make sure it is reinstalled after the battery
has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: See an authorized dealer for low
voltage battery access, testing, or
replacement.
294
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
When a low voltage battery replacement is
necessary, see an authorized dealer to
replace the low voltage battery with a Ford
recommended replacement low voltage
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle
To ensure proper operation of the battery
management system (BMS), do not allow a
technician to connect any electrical device
ground connection directly to the low voltage
battery negative post. A connection at the
low voltage battery negative post can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: If a person adds electrical or electronic
accessories or components to the vehicle,
the accessories or components may
adversely affect the low voltage battery
performance and durability and may also
affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make
certain the battery cables are always tightly
fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
When a battery replacement is required, the
battery should only be replaced with a Ford
recommended replacement battery that
matches the electrical requirements of the
vehicle.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are maintained
by power from the low voltage battery. Some
engine computer settings, like the idle trim
and fuel trim strategy, optimize the
driveability and performance of the engine.
Some other computer settings, like the clock
and radio station presets, are also maintained
in memory by power from the low voltage
battery. When a technician disconnects and
connects the low voltage battery, these
settings are erased.
Note: Until you switch the ignition to the on
position, you will receive a message in your
information display stating that your vehicle
is not in park.
Complete the following procedure in order
to restore the settings:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set
the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into P.
3. Turn off all accessories.
4. Step on the brake pedal and start the
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the engine
is warming up, complete the following:
Reset the clock. See Audio System
(page 358). Reset the power windows
bounce-back feature. See Windows and
Mirrors (page 94). Reset the radio station
presets. See Audio System (page 358).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute. If the engine turns off, step on
the accelerator to start the engine.
295
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
7. While the engine is running, step on the
brake pedal and shift the transmission to
N.
8. Allow the engine to run for at least one
minute by pressing on the accelerator
pedal.
9. Drive your vehicle at least 10 miles (16
kilometers) to completely relearn the idle
and fuel trim strategy.
Note: Certain features may not operate if
the Battery Monitor System is not reset with
a scan tool following a jump start or battery
replacement. Normal electrical accessory
operation should resume after your vehicle
is left undisturbed for 8 hours.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim
strategy.
Note: Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner. Follow
your local authorized standards for disposal.
Call your local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling automotive
batteries.
Note: It is recommended that the negative
battery cable terminal be disconnected from
the battery if you plan to store your vehicle
for an extended period of time.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or
water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
Poor wiper quality can be improved by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
Replace wiper blades annually for optimum
performance.
Front Wiper Blades
Lift the wiper arms away from the windshield.
E129990
1
1
2
1. Press the locking buttons together.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
3. Install in the reverse order.
296
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back to the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when you switch the ignition on.
Rear Wiper Blade
Lift the wiper arms away from the rear
window.
E183236
1. Remove the wiper blade.
2. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The assembly plant properly aims the
headlamps on your vehicle. If your vehicle
has been in an accident, have the alignment
of your headlamps checked by your
authorized dealer.
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall
or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb
center from the ground and mark an 8
foot (2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
297
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
light the wall or screen and open the
hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen, you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light located
at the top of the right hand portion of the
beam pattern. If the top edge of the high
intensity light zone is not at the horizontal
reference line, you will need to adjust the
headlamp.
E171165
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to aim the headlamp.
6. Close the hood and switch off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle
and is non-adjustable.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
E171166
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the
off position and open the hood.
2. Remove the pushpin and the four screws
from the headlamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the headlamp assembly as
far as possible toward the front of the
vehicle to disengage it from the lower
fixing point.
4. Carefully lift the outer side of the
headlamp and remove it.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
298
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off. Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious personal injury.
Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb
cool down before removing it. Failure
to do so could result in personal injury.
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp (If
Equipped)
These lamps operate at a high voltage. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
Front Direction Indicator
E171167
1. Remove the headlamp. See Removing
a Headlamp (page 298).
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See an
authorized dealer if they fail.
The following lamps are LED:
•Side direction indicators.
•Approach lamp.
•Brake and rear lamps.
•Rear direction indicators.
•Reversing lamps.
•Central high mounted brake lamp.
License Plate Lamp
3
2
1
E72789
1. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
lamp.
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
299
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
The specified replacement bulbs are in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T.
(Department of Transportation) for North
America to affirm lamp performance, light
brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The
correct bulbs will not damage the lamp
assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty
and will provide quality bulb burn time.
Trade numberFunction
D3S* Headlamp (high intensity discharge) Low/High
LED* Sidemarker - front
LED* Park lamp - front
7444NA* Turn lamp - front
LEDSignal indicator mirror lamp
LEDWelcome light
LEDApproach lamp
LED* Tail/brake lamp
LED* Turn lamp - rear
LED* Backup lamp
W5WLicense plate lamp
300
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Trade numberFunction
LED* High-mount brake lamp
LED* Interior lamps
* To replace these lamps, see your authorized dealer.
To replace instrument panel lights, see your authorized dealer.
301
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not start
your engine with the air cleaner removed.
Do not remove the air cleaner while the
engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed in the
Motorcraft Parts table. See Motorcraft Parts
(page 343).
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enter the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page
367).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
E171370
1. Loosen the four fasteners and remove
the air cleaner assembly lid.
2. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
3. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air
cleaner assembly to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and to make sure you
have a good seal.
E170433
302
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
4. Install the new air filter element. Slide the
open end of the air filter element in first,
below the tab. Then push the closed end
of the air filter into the bottom of the tray.
The closed end should fit inside the
groove in the tray. The tab of the closed
end of the air filter should be oriented
down and fit between the forks on the
tray as shown at the arrow above.
Note: Make sure you align the tab in the air
filter element with the fork in the air cleaner
assembly tray.
5. Install the air cleaner assembly lid and
tighten the four fasteners.
303
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
•Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
•Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
(ZC-15)
•Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
•Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
•Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
•Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada
only) (CXC-66-A)
•Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-101)
•Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-100)
•Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield
Washer Fluid (Canada only) [CXC-37-(A,
B, D or F)]
•Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash
Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-B2)
•Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
•Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-56)
•Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.
only) (ZC-14)
•Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23)
•Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner
(ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,
we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.
•Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
•Never wash your vehicle when is hot to
the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
•Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
•Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. We
recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
•Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
304
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
Exterior Chrome Parts
•Apply a high quality-cleaning product to
bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. We
recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner.
•Do not apply the cleaning product to hot
surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer than
the time recommended.
•Using other non-recommended cleaners
can result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots
are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Do not use a commercial or high-pressure
sprayer on the surface or edge of stripes and
graphics. This can damage them and cause
the edges to peel away from the vehicle
surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle
frequently. Keep body and door drain holes
free of debris or foreign material.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
Always wash your vehicle before applying
wax.
•Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
•Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to
apply and remove the wax.
•Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
•Do not allow wax to come in contact with
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored
trim. The wax will discolor or stain the
parts over time.
•Roof racks.
•Bumpers.
•Grained door handles.
•Side moldings.
•Mirror housings.
•Windshield cowl area.
•Do not apply wax to glass areas.
•After waxing, your car's paint should feel
smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
305
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
•Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
•Do not spray a hot engine with cold water
to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
•Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
•Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
•Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the
area in and around these locations.
•Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
•Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior
of the windshield, avoid getting any glass
cleaner on the instrument panel or door
panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these
surfaces immediately.
•For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
•Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
306
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts, as
these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such
products could contaminate the side airbag
system and affect performance of the side
airbag in a collision.
Note: Follow the same procedure for
cleaning leather seats when cleaning leather
interior. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
310).
Note: Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can stain
and discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner.
For grease or tar stains:
•Spot clean the area with Motorcraft Spot
and Stain Remover (Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose Cleaner in Canada).
•If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or
the ring will set.
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior (If Equipped)
Note: Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric is
made of polyester microfiber with
micro-porous polyurethane. Using
commercially available fabric cleaners can
cause permanent damage.
Note: Do not use commercially available
leather and vinyl cleaning products on
Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric.
Note: Lincoln Black Label or Presidential
vehicles may have Alcantara microfiber cloth
fabric on the seats, headliner, floor mats and
door panels.
Depending on the type of stain, use water,
lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
cleaning. For cleaning Alcantara microfiber
cloth, refer to the following chart:
307
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
Cleaning ProcedureType of Stain
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup.
Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Avoid warm
water because it makes these substances coagulate.
Blood, egg, excrement or urine.
Use lukewarm water. If the color remains, treat with lemon juice and
then rinse.
Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola and tea.
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry with cream or chocolate, ice
cream or mustard.
Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with
clean water.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee with sugar.
Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water.Dye transfer and all other stains.
308
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or strong
detergents when cleaning the steering
wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
310).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens
with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use
a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.
•Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
•Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these may
damage the finish of the instrument
panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
•Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
•Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft
cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors. Test any cleaner or stain
remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water
solution or cleaning product to a clean,
soft cloth and press it onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion
for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
309
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather
and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Clean and treat spills and stains as soon
as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
•Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
•Household cleaners.
•Alcohol solutions.
•Solvents or cleaners intended specifically
for rubber, vinyl and plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle color
code is printed on a sticker on the front,
left-hand side door jamb. Take your color
code to your authorized dealer to make sure
you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS (If
Equipped)
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or
high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
310
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
•Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Apply
using manufacturer's instructions.
•Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits
of dirt and brake dust accumulation.
•Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of
water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
•To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft
Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make sure
your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and
their components for reliable, regular driving.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve engine components.
General
•Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
•Protect from sunlight, if possible.
•If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
•Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the
underside of front fenders.
•Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
•Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
•Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
•Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.
•Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
•Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
•Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminates which may cause engine
damage.
•Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
•With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
•We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
•Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
311
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
Cooling system
•Protect against freezing temperatures.
•When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling system
leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
•Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
•If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
•Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
•Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
•Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
•Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
•Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
•Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
•Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
•Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage.
•Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.
•Check brake pedal operation. Drive your
vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
•Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
•If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.
312
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury
or death from a rollover or other crash you
must avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for the
conditions, keep tires properly inflated, never
overload or improperly load your vehicle,
and make sure every passenger is properly
restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants
must wear seat belts, and children and
infants must use appropriate restraints to
minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
E145298
Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently
than passenger cars in the various driving
conditions that are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and
trucks are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to reduce
the risk of an accident or serious injury.
All-wheel drive system (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of all-wheel-drive vehicles.
Although an all-wheel-drive vehicle may
accelerate better than a two-wheel drive
vehicle in low traction situations, it will not
stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with all-wheel drive has
the ability to use all four wheels to power
itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional
two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
For all-wheel-drive vehicles, a spare tire of
a different size other than the tire provided
should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire
size (other than the spare tire provided) or
major dissimilar tire sized between the front
and rear axles could cause the
all-wheel-drive system to stop functioning
and default to front-wheel drive.
313
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
How your vehicle differs from other
vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few noticeable
ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145299
•Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
•Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components. All
other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
•Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
314
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
E168583
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and trucks
often will have a higher center of gravity and
a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently than
an ordinary passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches or limited production tires
as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford Motor
Company to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as
the government has written it.
315
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1½ times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 139. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the original
equipment tire sizes, recommended
inflation pressure and the maximum
weight the vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number (TIN): A
number on the sidewall of each tire
providing information about the tire
brand and manufacturing plant, tire size
and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
316
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
*Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For
example: For P-metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) or 36 psi (2.5 bar) depending
on tires size and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier
maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure
when the vehicle has been stationary
and out of direct sunlight for an hour or
more and prior to the vehicle being
driven for 1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation pressure: The
cold inflation pressure found on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member at the
side of the vehicle behind the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts the
road when mounted on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a
tire or a tire and tube assembly upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
317
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
CDEFG
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire
size, load index and speed rating. The
definitions of these items are listed
below. (Note that the tire size, load index
and speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that may be
used for service on cars, sport utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a
letter this may mean it is designated by
either the European Tire and Rim
Technical Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It
is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find this
information in your owner’s manual. If
not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle may
operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The ratings
range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to
186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
318
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Speed ratingLetter rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
Speed ratingLetter rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire
manufacturers sometimes use the letters
ZR. For those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters
ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two
numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured,
the next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st
week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification
codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers
if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies or
the number of layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
319
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. See the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), for the correct
tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one and
one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C.
The grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
*Temperature: The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This pressure
is normally higher than the vehicle
manufacturer's recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load or radial tubeless.
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply
to this type of tire.
320
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
A
BC
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying
capabilities and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a dual, defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a single, defined as two tires (total)
on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
BCDE
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below:
321
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for temporary service on cars,
sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short
sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire
inflation pressure by tire size and other
important information located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Remember that a tire can lose up to half
of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your
tires. If one looks lower than the others,
use a tire gauge to check pressure of all
tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including
spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable
tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be
inaccurate. Ford recommends the use
of a digital or dial-type tire pressure
gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire performance
and wear. Under-inflation or
over-inflation may cause uneven
treadwear patterns.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failures and may result
in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting
in heat buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in unnecessary
tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can lose up
to half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
322
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Always inflate your tires to the Ford
recommended inflation pressure even
if it is less than the maximum inflation
pressure information found on the tire.
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle
handles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire
manufacturer's maximum permissible
pressure and the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire.
This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes
occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 11°F (6°C) temperature drop
can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi
(7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your
tire pressures frequently and adjust
them to the proper pressure which can
be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure
when the tire is hot, (for example, driven
more than 1 mi (1.6 km), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are hot
from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire
at or below recommended cold inflation
pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to
get air for your tire(s), check and record
the tire pressure first and add the
appropriate air pressure when you get
to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go up
as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on
one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure
the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
323
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air
by pressing on the metal stem in the
center of the valve. Then recheck the
pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a
higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. For T type mini-spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare tires,
see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at the higher of the
front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make
sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke
a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure
there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve
Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for
uneven or excessive wear and remove
objects such as stones, nails or glass
that may be wedged in the tread
grooves. Check the tire and valve stems
for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit
air leakage and repair or replace the tire
and replace the valve stem. Inspect the
tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises
and other signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired
or replaced. For your safety, tires that
are damaged or show signs of excessive
wear should not be used because they
are more likely to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires,
including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
324
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your vehicle
from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear on
the tire when the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to the
same height as these wear bars, the tire
is worn out and must be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the
tread groove and separation in the tread
or sidewall). If damage is observed or
suspected, have the tire inspected by a
tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also recommended.
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time depending
on many factors such as weather,
storage conditions, and conditions of
use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the
tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after
six years regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process and may
require tires to be replaced more
frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when
you replace the road tires or after six
years due to aging even if it has not
been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
325
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended
tire and wheel size may be found on
either the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the
driver’s door. If this information is not
found on these labels then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk
WARNINGS
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle,
transfer case or power transfer unit
failure. If you have questions regarding
tire replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
To reduce the risk of serious injury,
when mounting replacement tires
and wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads
without additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting
pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following precautions must
be taken to protect the person mounting
the tire:
WARNINGS
1. Make sure that you have the correct
tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66
meters) away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or
other tire service professional should do
the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a
remote air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66
meters) away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
326
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front
tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels (originally installed on your
vehicle) are not designed to be used in
aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire
pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, your system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire
might be incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud, or sand, do not rapidly spin
the tires. Spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A tire can
explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
Do not spin the wheels over
35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there
is always the possibility that you may
eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe
area out of traffic. This may further
damage the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you suspect
your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive
with caution until you can safely pull off
the road. Stop and inspect the tires for
damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and wheel.
If you cannot detect a cause, have the
vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
327
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole
can cause the front end of your vehicle
to become misaligned or cause damage
to your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are driving,
the wheels may be out of alignment.
Have an authorized dealer check the
wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the
rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those
with an independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment of all
four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear,
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem
involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and
tire assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is different
in brand, size or appearance from the
road tires and wheels. If you have a
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly, it is intended for temporary
use only and should not be used in a
tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended
interval (as indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help your tires
wear more evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
Non-directional tires
E142547
328
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Directional tires
E70415
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size, load
index, speed rating as those originally
provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need to
use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications)
be used, as cables may chip aluminum
wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction devices
•If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle
•Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body to
tire dimension restrictions.
•Use 10 mm cables or chains only on front
axle with 235/50R18 tires.
•Not all S-class snow chains or cables
meet these restrictions. Chains of this
size restriction will include a tensioning
device.
•The snow chains or cables must be
mounted in pairs on the front axle.
•Do not use chains or cables on
235/45R19 and 245/45R19 tires.
•Install cables securely, verifying that the
cables do not touch any wiring, brake
lines or fuel lines.
•When driving with tire cables do not
exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
•Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against the vehicle, stop and
retighten them. If this does not work,
remove the cables to prevent vehicle
damage.
•Remove the cables when they are no
longer needed. Do not use cables on dry
roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
329
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system is
not a substitute for manually checking
tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using
a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in this
chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
330
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least
monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See
Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light
will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly
low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires
are under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
331
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when your
tires need air. It can also warn you in the
event the system is no longer capable of
functioning as intended. See the following
chart for information concerning your tire
pressure monitoring system:
332
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning light
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
333
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a
gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over
20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after
you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While
driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may
increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from
a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as being
significantly lower than the recommended
inflation pressure and activate the system
warning light for low tire pressure. If the low
tire pressure warning light is on, visually
check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If
one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the road
tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully
drive the vehicle to the nearest location
where air can be added to the tires. Inflate
all the tires to the recommended inflation
pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used.
The tire pressure monitoring system sensor
and valve stem on the wheel must be
replaced by an authorized dealer after use
of the sealant.
WARNINGS
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 330). If the tire pressure monitor
sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer
function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply
the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place
on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer
in order to prevent damage to the tire
pressure monitoring system sensors. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 330).
Replace the spare tire with a road tire as
soon as possible. During repairing or
replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized
dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor for damage.
334
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines could
result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided by Ford.
If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, it should be replaced rather than
repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly
that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels and can be
one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins
with the letter T for tire size and may have
Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on
wheel: This spare tire has a label on the
wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare
tires listed above, do not:
•Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
•Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
•Tow a trailer.
•Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
•Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
•Use commercial car washing equipment.
•Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed
above at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking
performance.
•Comfort and noise.
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
•Winter weather driving capability.
•Wet weather driving capability.
•All-wheel driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label
on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
•Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
•Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
•Use commercial car washing equipment.
•Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking
performance.
•Comfort and noise.
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
•Winter weather driving capability.
335
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
•Wet weather driving capability.
•All-wheel driving capability
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
•Towing a trailer.
•Driving vehicles equipped with a camper
body.
•Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off the
ground, the transmission alone will not
prevent your vehicle from moving or slipping
off the jack, even if the transmission is in park
(P) or neutral (N).
WARNINGS
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park (P) or
neutral (N), set the parking brake, and block
(in both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of
your vehicle) to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that is
supported only by a jack. If the vehicle
slips off the jack, you or someone else could
be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating the
jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one provided
as original equipment with your vehicle,
make sure the jack capacity is adequate for
the vehicle weight, including any vehicle
cargo or modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
3. Remove the carpeted wheel cover.
4. Remove the wing nut that secures the
spare tire by turning it counterclockwise.
E160855
5. Remove the jack from the foam holder.
The lug wrench is located in the left side
storage foam next to the spare tire.
Remove the flat tire retainer strap from
the jack base.
336
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
E142551
6. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
7. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off the
ground.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid
damage to the vehicle.
8. The vehicle jacking points are shown
here, and are depicted on the warning
label on the jack.
E145908
9. Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills
show the location of the jacking points.
E162190
10. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
Note: If equipped with full wheel covers with
exposed wheel nuts, remove the wheel nuts
prior to removing the wheel cover or damage
to the wheel cover may occur.
11. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
12. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
34
5
E75442
337
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
13. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 340).
Stowing the flat tire
1. Put the jack and lug wrench away. Make
sure the jack is fastened so it does not
rattle when you drive.
2. Unblock the wheels.
3. Stow the flat tire on the floor in the cargo
area. Secure with the flat tire retainer
strap by following the next steps:
E142906
4. Locate the cargo tie-down near the
seatback. Push the loop of the retainer
strap through the tie-down. Thread the
non-loop end through the loop.
E157926
5. Weave the retainer strap through the
wheel openings.
6. Locate the front cargo tie-down at the
opposite corner of the cargo area to the
tie-down used in Step 4. Thread the
retainer strap through the tie-down and
pull tight.
7. Secure by tying a 2-half hitch knot.
338
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
E143746
339
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the
surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the
hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at
the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss
of control.
Ib-ft (Nm)*
Bolt size
100 (135)M12 x 1.5
*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a
flat tire, wheel removal).
340
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
341
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
2.3L EcoBoost engine2.0L EcoBoost engineEngine
138122Cubic inches
9.5:19.3:1Compression ratio
0.027-0.031 in. (0.70-0.80 mm)0.027-0.031 in. (0.70-0.80 mm)Spark plug gap
Drivebelt Routing
E161383
A
B
A. The long drivebelt is on the first pulley
groove closest to the engine
B. The short drivebelt is on the second
pulley groove farthest from the engine
342
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
Motorcraft part numberComponent
FA-1908Air filter element
FL-910-SOil filter
BXT-48H6-610Battery
SP-537Spark plugs
FP70Cabin air filter
WW-2550 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-1575 (passenger side)
WW-1106 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet
or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance,
emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 367).
343
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or
the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
344
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The following
table shows the transmission code along
with the transmission description.
CodeDescription
6Six-speed automatic transmission 6F35
345
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
5.7 qt (5.4 L)Engine oil
9.7 qt (9.2 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15L)Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
9.0 qt (8.5 L)*Automatic transmission fluid
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
15.5 gal (58.5 L)Fuel tank
24 oz (0.68 kg)A/C refrigerant
4.6 fl oz (136 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
346
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
347
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid:
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
348
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
349
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
SpecificationName
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
•Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your
vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use
motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
350
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage and
possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
5.7 qt (5.4 L)Engine oil
9.2 qt (8.7 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
351
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
CapacityItem
2.4 pt (1.15L)Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
9.0 qt (8.5 L)*Automatic transmission fluid
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
15.5 gal (58.5 L)Fuel tank
24 oz (0.68 kg)A/C refrigerant
4.6 fl oz (136 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
352
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
353
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid:
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
354
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
355
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
SpecificationName
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
•Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your
vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use
motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
356
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage and
possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
357
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
•AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
•FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner
only. Wipe it from the center of the disc
toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular
motion.
358
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Information Provided by:
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat
sources for extended periods.
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 individual tracks and folder
structures work as follows:
•There are two different modes for MP3
disc playback: MP3 track mode (system
default) and MP3 folder mode.
•MP3 track mode ignores any folder
structure on the MP3 disc. The player
numbers each MP3 track on the disc
(noted by the .mp3 file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 files
may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio
present.
•MP3 folder mode represents a folder
structure consisting of one level of
folders. The CD player numbers all MP3
tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) and all folders containing MP3
files, from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to
F253 T255.
•Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through the
disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is
important to understand how the system
reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only files with
the .mp3 extension are played; other files
are ignored by the system. This enables you
to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of
tasks on your work computer, home
computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays
the structure as if it were only one level deep
(all .mp3 files play, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system
only plays the .mp3 files in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: The touch system controls most of the
audio features. See SYNC supplement.
359
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Information Provided by:
A B
CDE
F
E171512
CD slot: Insert a CD.A
Eject: Press the control to eject a CD.B
360
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Information Provided by:
TUNE: Turn the control to search manually through the radio frequency band. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, the system selects the previous or next channel. If you select a specific category (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.),
turn the TUNE control to find the previous or next channel in the selected category.
C
Seek/Fast Forward/Reverse: Press the control to go to the previous or next track or available radio station. Press and hold to either
reverse or fast forward through the current track or to quickly reverse or advance through the radio bands in individual increments.
D
Volume: Turn the control to adjust the volume level on your system.E
Power: Press the control to switch the audio system on and off.F
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)
The media hub is located in a compartment
inside the center console.
E211463
See SYNC Supplement.
361
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Information Provided by:
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit our
online store at:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Lincoln.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.LincolnCanada.com
Lincoln Accessories are available for your
vehicle through an authorized Lincoln dealer.
Lincoln Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Lincoln Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your
accessory through the warranty that provides
the greatest benefit:
•24 months, unlimited mileage.
•The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and
a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
•Side-window deflectors.
•Splash guards.
Interior style
•All-weather floor mats.
•Rear seat entertainment.*
•Premium carpeted floor mats.
Lifestyle
•Ash cup (smoker's packages).
•Cargo area protector.
•Cargo net.
•Cargo organizer.
•Luggage cover.
•Recovery hook (towing eye).
•Roof racks and carriers.*
•Trailer hitch.
•Trailer hitch accessories.
Peace of mind
•Car cover.*
•Wheel locks.
•Locking fuel plug.
*Lincoln Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Lincoln Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Lincoln Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Lincoln dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
362
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
Information Provided by:
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories, equipment, passengers and
luggage to your vehicle:
•Do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Consult an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
•The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulate the use of radio
transmitter-equipped mobile
communications systems, for example,
two-way radios, telephones and theft
alarms. Any such equipment should
comply with the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulations, and an authorized dealer
should install this equipment.
•An authorized dealer should install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particular if
their manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
•If you or an authorized dealer add any
non-Lincoln electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect battery
performance and durability. In addition,
you may also adversely affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
363
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
Information Provided by:
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A
LINCOLN EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)
Lincoln owners have discovered the powerful
protection of Lincoln Extended Service Plan.
It is the only extended service plan backed
by Lincoln Motor Company, and provides
peace of mind protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Lincoln ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor
– can easily exceed the price of your Lincoln
Extended Service Plan. With Lincoln ESP,
you minimize your risk for unexpected repair
bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four Extended Service Plans with
different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive
coverage. With over 1000 covered
components, this plan is so complete that
we generally only discuss what’s not
covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Lincoln Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Lincoln and Ford dealers in
the United States, Canada and Mexico. It is
the only extended service plan authorized
and backed by Lincoln Motor Company.
That means you get:
•Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or
Ford dealership.
•Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
•Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts.
•Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
•Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
•Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
364
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Information Provided by:
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage to
the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle was
properly maintained with Lincoln ESP,
thereby improving resale value.
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Lincoln Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and select items
that routinely wear out. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
affording your vehicle maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
•Windshield wiper blades.
•Spark plugs.
•The clutch disc.
•Brake pads and linings.
•Shock absorbers and struts.
•Engine cooling hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
•Engine belts.
•Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable,
no interest, no fee payment program allowing
you all the security and benefits Lincoln ESP
has to offer while paying over time. You are
pre-approved with no credit checks, no
hassles! To learn more, call our Lincoln ESP
specialists at 800-367-3377.
Complete the information below and mail to:
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Lincoln Extended Service
Plan. Lincoln Extended Service Plan is the
only service contract backed by Lincoln
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Lincoln
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
•Rental reimbursement.
•Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
•Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
•Roadside Assistance benefits.
365
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Information Provided by:
There are several Lincoln Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is
tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Lincoln Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Lincoln Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada,
the United States and Mexico are not eligible
for Lincoln Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Lincoln of
Canada dealer or www.Lincoln.ca to find the
Lincoln Extended Service Plan that is right
for you.
366
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Information Provided by:
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you have
your vehicle serviced at the proper times.
These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep your cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 342).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the operation
of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about
the training and certification their technicians
have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement
Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one stop
shopping. They can perform any services
that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.
367
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
message in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval may
be up to one year or 10000 miles (16000
kilometers).
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles (800
kilometers) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
after each oil change. See Oil Change
Indicator Reset (page 289).
If your information display resets prematurely
or becomes inoperative, you should perform
the oil change interval at six months or 5000
miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10000
miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance systems.
Every manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts and
component systems based upon engineering
testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this
testing to determine the most appropriate
mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to
protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost
to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from
the scheduled maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized
re-manufactured replacement parts
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives and
chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives not
approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. However, a
qualified expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should
inspect discolored fluids that also show signs
of overheating or foreign material
contamination immediately.
368
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.
It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required
to fill and operate the system or using a
Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
369
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Check every six months
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or damageExhaust system
370
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Multi-Point inspection
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure**
Fluid levels*; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
* Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way
to perform a thorough inspection of your
vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate
feedback on the overall condition of your
vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your
vehicle and reduces environmental waste at
the same time.
This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in
the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.
371
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(5000-7999 km) Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
372
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display*
Change engine oil and filter.**
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
* Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
** Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 288).
373
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Other maintenance items 1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000
km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant. 2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km) Inspect accessory drive belt(s). 3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km) Replace accessory drive belt(s). 4
1 Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated
distance for the interval.
2 Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4 If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
374
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated. If
you operate your vehicle occasionally under
any of these conditions, it is not necessary
to perform the extra maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your
dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following
tables when specified or within 3000 miles
(4800 kilometers) of the OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message appearing in the
information display.
•Example 1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED
message comes on at 28751 miles
(46270 kilometers). Perform the
30000-mile (48000-kilometer) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
•Example 2: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message has not come on,
but the odometer reads 30000 miles
(48000 kilometers) (for example, the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset at
25000 miles [40000 kilometers]).
Perform the engine air filter replacement.
375
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.*
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
376
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
* This is an optional feature.
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace cabin air filter.*
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.Every 5000 miles (8000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Change engine oil and filter.**
Every 5000 miles (8000 km)
or six months
377
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
* This is an optional feature.
**Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 288).
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle Maintenance
Change the axle fluid anytime an axle is
submerged in water.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North
Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines
(Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality,
the normal oil change interval is 3000 miles
(5000 kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is 1800
miles (3000 kilometers).
378
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and
dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and cabin
air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
379
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
380
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
381
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
382
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
383
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
384
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
385
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
386
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
387
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
388
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
389
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
390
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
391
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
392
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
393
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
394
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
395
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
396
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
397
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
398
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
•You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have
acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that include
software licensed or owned by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD
MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software
products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY
origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE")
are protected by international intellectual
property laws and treaties. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
•The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO
NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON
THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA
grants you the following license:
•You may use the SOFTWARE as installed
on the DEVICES and as otherwise
interfacing with systems and/or services
provide by or through FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Description of Other Rights and Limitations
•Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that recognition
errors are inherent in the process.
Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor
its suppliers shall be liable for any
damages arising out of errors in the
speech recognition process. It is your
responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the
system.
•Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile,
translate, disassemble or attempt to
discover any source code or underlying
ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE
nor permit others to reverse engineer,
decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
399
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
•Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
•Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may contain
multiple EULAs, such as multiple
translations and/or multiple media
versions (e.g., in the user documentation
and in the software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use
only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
•SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer
of the DEVICES, provided you retain no
copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media
and printed materials, any upgrades, and,
if applicable, the Certificate(s) of
Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE
is an upgrade, any transfer must include
all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
•Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions of
this EULA.
•Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based
services. You acknowledge and agree
that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third
party software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components that
you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICES.
•Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of
the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE
("Supplemental Components".)
SOFTWARE updates may cause you to
incur additional charges from your
wireless service provider. If FORD
MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide
or make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms
are provided along with the
Supplemental Components, then the
terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD
400
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you
or made available to you through the use
of the SOFTWARE.
401
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
•Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The third
party sites are not under the control of
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent. Neither
FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its
affiliates nor its designated agent are
responsible for (i) the contents of any
third party sites, any links contained in
third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii)
webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third
party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides
links to third party sites, those links are
provided to you only as a convenience,
and the inclusion of any link does not
imply an endorsement of the third party
site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent.
•Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety and
you agree to assume any risk associated
with the use of the DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the
SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on
media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)
or via web download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For
Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one
(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICES as a replacement copy for the
existing SOFTWARE, and use it in
accordance with this EULA, including any
additional EULA terms accompanying the
upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated
into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials accompanying
the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which
may be accessed through use of the
SOFTWARE is the property of the respective
content owner and may be protected by
applicable copyright or other intellectual
property laws and treaties. This EULA grants
you no rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and
third party software and service providers
and suppliers. Use of any on-line services
which may be accessed through the
SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
402
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge
that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and
European Union export jurisdiction. You
agree to comply with all applicable
international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as
end-user, end-use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in
the documentation for the DEVICES product
support, such as the vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow instructions:
•Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following
precautions found in the Owner Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious
injuries.
General Operation
•Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system may
be accomplished using voice commands.
Using voice commands while driving
helps you to operate the system without
removing your hands from the wheel or
eyes from the road.
•Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
•Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic
and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these
sounds could cause an accident.
403
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
•Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
•Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can distract
your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious injury. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
•Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic regulations.
Any such feature is not a substitute for
your personal judgment. Any route
suggestions made by this system should
never replace any local traffic regulations
or your personal judgment or knowledge
of safe driving practices.
•Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to follow
the suggested directions.
•Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always use
good judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
•Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals and
clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation
features.
404
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
405
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
•You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving
an automobile or other vehicle in
violation of applicable law or otherwise
driving in an unsafe manner presents a
significant risk of distracted driving and
should not be attempted under any
circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE
at excessive volume poses a significant
risk of hearing damage and should not
be attempted under any
circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may
not be compatible with new or different
versions of an operating system, third
party software, or third party services,
and the SOFTWARE may potentially
cause a critical failure of an operating
system, third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software used
with the SOFTWARE (i) may charge an
additional fee for access, (ii) may not
work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis,
or error free, (iii) may change streaming
formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may
contain adult, profane or offensive
content; and (v) may contain inaccurate,
false or misleading traffic, weather,
financial or safety information or other
content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider (WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference only,
are not warranted in any way and should
not be relied upon in anyway.
•When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in Section
(a) – (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT
IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE
SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS
AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND
FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET
ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a)
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE,
(d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL
406
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE
GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE
DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO
YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND
IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION
INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO
THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY
CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS
SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET,
THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL
CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
•The laws of the State of Michigan govern
this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE
may also be subject to other local, state,
national, or international laws. Any
litigation arising out of or related to this
EULA shall be brought and maintained
exclusively in a court of the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County or in
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to any
dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A
DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT
INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute
means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed
above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including
its price) or this EULA, whether in contract,
warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance,
or any other legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the party
giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute,
and the relief requested. You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve
any dispute through informal negotiation
within 60 days from the date the Notice of
Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY may commence
arbitration.
407
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
(c) Small claims court. You may also litigate
any dispute in small claims court in your
county of residence or FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S principal place of business, if
the dispute meets all requirements to be
heard in the small claims court. You may
litigate in small claims court whether or not
You negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve the
dispute will be conducted exclusively by
binding arbitration. You are giving up the
right to litigate (or participate in as a party or
class member) all disputes in court before a
judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be
resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose
decision will be final except for a limited right
of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act.
Any court with jurisdiction over the parties
may enforce the arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to
resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum
will be conducted solely on an individual
basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute
heard as a class action, as a private attorney
general action, or in any other proceeding
in which any party acts or proposes to act in
a representative capacity. No arbitration or
proceeding will be combined with another
without the prior written consent of all parties
to all affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration
will be conducted by the American
Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its
Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an
individual and use the SOFTWARE for
personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the
dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not
You are an individual or how You use the
SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary
Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes
will also apply. To commence arbitration,
submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules
Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You
may request a telephonic or in-person
hearing by following the AAA rules. In a
dispute involving $10,000 or less, any
hearing will be telephonic unless the
arbitrator finds good cause to hold an
in-person hearing instead. For more
information, see adr.org or call
1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence
arbitration only in your county of residence
or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal
place of business. The arbitrator may award
the same damages to You individually as a
court could. The arbitrator may award
declaratory or injunctive relief only to You
individually, and only to the extent required
to satisfy Your individual claim. Arbitration
fees and incentives.
•i. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly
reimburse your filing fees and pay the
AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement offer
made before the arbitrator was appointed
(“last written offer”), your dispute goes
all the way to an arbitrator’s decision
(called an “award”), and the arbitrator
awards you more than the last written
offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give
408
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
you three incentives: (1) pay the greater
of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and (3)
reimburse any expenses (including expert
witness fees and costs) that your attorney
reasonably accrues for investigating,
preparing, and pursuing your claim in
arbitration. The arbitrator will determine
the amounts.
•ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000.
The AAA rules will govern payment of
filing fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s
fees and expenses.
•iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any
arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or
arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your
filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY
commences, it will pay all filing, AAA, and
arbitrator’s fees and expenses. It will not
seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from
you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses
are not counted in determining how
much a dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed within
one year. To the extent permitted by law,
any claim or dispute under this EULA to
which this Section applies must be filed
within one year in small claims court (Section
c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year
period begins when the claim or dispute first
could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is
not filed within one year, it is permanently
barred.
(i) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts
will be severed and proceed in a court of
law, with the remaining parts proceeding in
arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be severed
with the remainder of Section e remaining in
full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software
indicates that you accept these terms and
conditions. If you do not accept these terms
and conditions, do not break the seal of the
package, launch, or otherwise use the
TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this
Agreement and the privacy policy at any
time, with or http://www.telenav.com from
time to time to review the then current
version of this Agreement and of the privacy
policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to
the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of
injury or death to you and others in situations
that otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to comply
with the following when using the TeleNav
Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive
safely;
409
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested by
the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and
cables necessary for use of the TeleNav
Software in a secure manner in your vehicle
so that they will not interfere with your
driving and will not prevent the operation of
any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from any
dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use
of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav
Software, to provide TeleNav with true,
accurate, current, and complete information
about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav
promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and
complete.
3. Software License
•Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby
grants to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use
the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
•(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the TeleNav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or
structure of the TeleNav Software without
the prior express written consent of
TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its
suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d) distribute,
sublicense or otherwise transfer the
TeleNav Software to others, except as
part of your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
i. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection, obscenity or
defamation, or
410
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene,
libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f)
lease, rent out, or otherwise permit
unauthorized access by third parties to the
TeleNav Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
•To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will
TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or
agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
TeleNav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely
on the TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the well-being
or survival of you or others is dependent
on the accuracy of navigation, as the
maps or functionality of the TeleNav
Software are not intended to support
such high risk applications, especially in
more remote geographical areas.
•TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE.
•Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
•TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS
OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE)
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT
INCUR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
411
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
•You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav Software
shall be settled by independent
arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator
and administered by the American
Arbitration Association in the County of
Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator
shall apply the Commercial Arbitration
Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon the
award rendered by the arbitrator may be
entered by any court having jurisdiction.
Note that there is no judge or jury in an
arbitration proceeding and the decision
of the arbitrator shall be binding upon
both parties. You expressly agree to
waive your right to a jury trial. This
Agreement and performance hereunder
will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of
California, without giving effect to its
conflict of law provisions. To the extent
judicial action is necessary in connection
with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav
and you agree to submit to the exclusive
jurisdiction of the courts of the County of
Santa Clara, California. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
•You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent transfer
of the TeleNav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound
by the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment
or transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to TeleNav, in which case
you and all other parties shall
immediately cease all use of the TeleNav
Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
412
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
not expressly granted in this Agreement are
intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred
by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel
or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you consent
to receive from TeleNav all communications,
including notices, agreements, legally
required disclosures or other information in
connection with the TeleNav Software
(collectively, "Notices") electronically.
TeleNav may provide such Notices by
posting them on TeleNav's Website or by
downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your
consent to receive Notices electronically,
you must discontinue your use of the
TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not affect
that party's right to require performance at
any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any
breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach
or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable,
then such provision will be modified to reflect
the intention of the parties, and the
remaining provisions of this Agreement will
remain in full force and effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and
will not be referred to in connection with the
construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the
words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be
terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed
to be followed by the words "without
limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
•The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors::
413
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors
(including their licensors and suppliers) on
the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the
United States Postal Service® to publish and
sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices
are not established, controlled or approved
by the United States Postal Service®. The
following trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States Postal
Service, USPS, and ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to
the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works of,
or reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph,
you may not use this Data (a) with any
products, systems, or applications installed
or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real
time route guidance, fleet management or
similar applications; or (b) with or in
communication with any positioning devices
or any mobile or wireless-connected
electronic or computer devices, including
without limitation cellular phones, palmtop
and handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate
or incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
414
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results
to be obtained from this Data, or that the
Data or server will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent the
above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some States, Territories and Countries do
not allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered by
the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent that
any such export laws, rules or regulations
prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute
Data, such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors, including
their licensors and suppliers) and you
pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all
written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
415
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used], without
giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded.
You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for any
and all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data provided
to you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is being
acquired by or on behalf of the United States
government or any other entity seeking or
applying rights similar to those customarily
claimed by the United States government,
this Data is a “commercial item” as that term
is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is
licensed in accordance with these End-User
Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the following
“Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in
accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West
Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-
User Terms under which this Data was
provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use
the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any
federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the
Data.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This
product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525;
6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192;
6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other
patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe,
Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other
416
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End User functions
of this device. This device may contain
content belonging to Gracenote's providers.
If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein
with respect to Gracenote Data shall also
apply to such content and such content
providers shall be entitled to all of the
benefits and protections set forth herein that
are available to Gracenote. You agree that
you will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer
or transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data
(except in a Tag associated with a music file)
to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE
OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote
Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or music
file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively
or separately, under this agreement against
you, directly in each company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose
of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page at
www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO
YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES
ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA
FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE
COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES
FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE
DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE
417
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
418
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Information Provided by:
A
A/C
See: Climate Control...........................................133
About This Manual............................................7
Protecting the Environment..................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................183
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................183
Accessories...................................................362
Exterior style........................................................362
Interior style.........................................................362
Lifestyle.................................................................362
Peace of mind.....................................................362
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts Recommendation.....12
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............204
Active Park Assist..........................................194
Automatic Steering into Parking Space........195
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature.............197
Park Out Assist.....................................................196
Troubleshooting the System............................198
Using Active Park Assist....................................194
Adjusting the Headlamps...........................297
Horizontal Aim Adjustment..............................298
Vertical Aim Adjustment...................................297
Adjusting the Steering Wheel......................79
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column................................................................79
Airbag Disposal................................................51
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control...........................................133
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm...........................................78
All-Wheel Drive..............................................178
Ambient Lighting.............................................93
Anti-Theft Alarm..............................................78
Arming the Alarm..................................................78
Disarming the Alarm.............................................78
Appendices....................................................399
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............107
Headlamps On Warning Chime.......................107
Keyless Warning Alert........................................107
Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................108
Audio Control..................................................80
Seek, Next or Previous........................................80
Audio System................................................358
General Information...........................................358
Audio Unit......................................................359
Autolamps.........................................................88
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps........89
Automatic Climate Control..........................133
Automatic High Beam Control.....................91
Activating the System...........................................91
Manually Overriding the System......................92
Automatic Transmission...............................172
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning.............................................................176
Brake-Shift Interlock Override.........................175
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow...................................................................176
Push Button Shift Transmission.......................172
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission..............174
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check...........................................................293
Autowipers.......................................................84
Auxiliary Power Points.................................155
110 Volt AC Power Point....................................155
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................155
Locations...............................................................155
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive...........................................178
B
Blind Spot Information System..................219
Switching the System Off and On...................221
System Errors.......................................................221
Using the System................................................219
419
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Information Provided by:
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............282
Booster Seats..................................................24
Types of Booster Seats.......................................25
Brake Fluid Check........................................293
Brakes..............................................................183
General Information............................................183
Breaking-In.....................................................249
Bulb Specification Chart.............................300
C
Cabin Air Filter................................................137
California Proposition 65................................11
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™....................................................346
Specifications.......................................................347
Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™.....................................................351
Specifications......................................................353
Capacities and Specifications...................342
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................304
Center Console..............................................157
Changing a Bulb...........................................299
Front Direction Indicator..................................299
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp.............299
LED Lamps...........................................................299
License Plate Lamp...........................................299
Changing a Fuse...........................................281
Fuses......................................................................281
Changing a Road Wheel.............................334
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.......................................................335
Tire Change Procedure....................................336
Changing the 12V Battery..........................294
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................302
Changing the Wiper Blades......................296
Front Wiper Blades............................................296
Rear Wiper Blade................................................297
Checking MyKey System Status..................61
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................296
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance..................................................38
Child Safety.......................................................16
General Information..............................................16
Child Safety Locks..........................................28
Left-Hand Side.......................................................29
Right-Hand Side....................................................29
Child Seat Positioning....................................27
Cleaning Leather Seats...............................310
Cleaning Products........................................304
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.........................310
Cleaning the Engine....................................306
Cleaning the Exterior..................................304
Exterior Chrome Parts.......................................305
Exterior Plastic Parts..........................................305
Stripes or Graphics............................................305
Underbody...........................................................305
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens...........................309
Cleaning the Interior....................................307
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior...............................................................307
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................306
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................59
Climate Control..............................................133
Climate Controlled Seats.............................147
Cooled Seats........................................................148
Collision Warning System..........................226
Principle Of Operation......................................226
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................289
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........49
Creating a MyKey...........................................58
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................58
420
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Information Provided by:
Cross Traffic Alert..........................................221
False Alerts..........................................................225
Switching the System Off and On..................225
System Errors......................................................225
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts.................................................................224
System Limitations.............................................224
Using the System................................................221
Cruise Control...................................................81
Principle of Operation.......................................203
Type 1........................................................................81
Type 2.......................................................................81
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control...............................203
Customer Assistance..................................258
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording...........................................10
Service Data Recording.........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps...............................90
Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable)..........................................90
Type 2 - Configurable..........................................90
Direction Indicators........................................92
Drive Control.................................................229
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL............................229
Driver Alert......................................................213
Using Driver Alert................................................213
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................42
Children and Airbags...........................................43
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.........................................................43
Driver Knee Airbag.........................................48
Driving Aids.....................................................213
Driving Hints..................................................249
Driving Through Water...............................250
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps...........................90
E
Economical Driving......................................249
Electric Parking Brake..................................184
Applying the electric parking brake...............184
Applying the electric parking brake when the
vehicle is moving............................................185
Battery With No Charge....................................186
Releasing the electric parking brake.............185
Emission Control System............................169
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)........................170
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing.................................................................171
End User License Agreement...................399
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) ....................................399
Engine Block Heater....................................162
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................162
Engine Coolant Check................................289
Adding Engine Coolant.....................................291
Checking the Engine Coolant.........................289
Recycled Engine Coolant..................................291
Severe Climates..................................................291
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling.............................................................292
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.........................77
Engine Oil Check.........................................288
Adding Engine Oil..............................................288
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................288
Engine Specifications..................................342
Drivebelt Routing................................................342
Environment......................................................15
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake..............................184
421
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Information Provided by:
Essential Towing Checks............................244
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................245
Hitches..................................................................244
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)............................................246
Safety Chains......................................................245
Trailer Brakes.......................................................245
Trailer Lamps.......................................................245
When Towing a Trailer.......................................245
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options...................................14
Extended Service Plan (ESP).....................364
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)................365
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only).............................364
Exterior Mirrors................................................95
Auto-Dimming Feature........................................97
Blind Spot Monitor................................................98
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors.................................96
Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................97
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors.............................97
Lincoln Welcome Mat...........................................97
Memory Mirrors.....................................................97
Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................95
F
Fastening the Safety Belts............................31
How to Extract Safety Belts in the Rear
Outboard Positions..........................................34
Safety Belt Extension Assembly.......................34
Safety Belt Locking Modes................................32
Using a Sliding Clip..............................................32
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy.............32
Floor Mats......................................................250
Front Parking Aid...........................................193
Front Passenger Sensing System..............44
Fuel and Refueling........................................163
Fuel Consumption.........................................168
Calculating Fuel Economy................................168
Filling the Tank.....................................................168
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................165
Fuel Filter........................................................294
Fuel Quality.....................................................164
Choosing the Right Fuel....................................164
Fuel Shutoff...................................................253
Fuses...............................................................265
Fuse Specification Chart............................265
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box...............272
Power Distribution Box.....................................265
Pre-Fuse Box.......................................................265
Rear Cargo Fuse Box.........................................277
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............150
Gauges............................................................102
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.............104
Fuel Gauge...........................................................103
Information Display.............................................103
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................52
Intelligent Access.................................................52
General Maintenance Information...........367
Multi-Point Inspection........................................370
Owner Checks and Services...........................369
Protecting Your Investment..............................367
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.............................367
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?......................................................367
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada..........................................................261
Getting the Services You Need................258
Away From Home..............................................258
Global Opening and Closing.......................95
Closing the Windows...........................................95
Opening the Windows.........................................95
422
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Information Provided by:
H
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................253
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................90
Head Restraints.............................................139
Adjusting the Head Restraint............................141
Heated Seats..................................................146
Front Seats............................................................146
Rear Seats.............................................................147
Heated Steering Wheel................................82
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................136
Heated Exterior Mirrors.....................................136
Heated Windows.................................................136
Heating
See: Climate Control...........................................133
Hill Start Assist...............................................186
Switching the System On and Off...................187
Using Hill Start Assist..........................................187
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................135
Cooling the Interior Quickly..............................136
General Hints........................................................135
Heating the Interior Quickly.............................135
Recommended Settings for Cooling .............136
Recommended Settings for Heating..............135
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather.............................................................136
Vehicles with Hands Free Calling and Voice
Control...............................................................136
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................183
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............282
I
In California (U.S. Only)...............................259
Information Display Control..........................81
Information Displays.....................................109
General Information............................................109
423
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Information Provided by:
Information Messages..................................115
Active Park.............................................................115
Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................116
AdvanceTrac™.........................................................117
Airbag......................................................................117
Alarm........................................................................117
All-Wheel Drive.....................................................118
Automatic Engine Shutdown.............................118
Battery and Charging System...........................119
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert
System...............................................................120
Collision Warning System.................................120
Doors and Locks...................................................121
Driver Alert.............................................................121
Fuel.........................................................................122
Hill Start Assist.....................................................122
Keys and Intelligent Access.............................122
Lane Keeping System........................................123
Maintenance.........................................................124
MyKey.....................................................................125
Park Aid..................................................................126
Park Brake.............................................................126
Power Steering.....................................................127
Remote Start.........................................................128
Seats.......................................................................128
Starting System ...................................................128
Tire Pressure Monitoring System....................129
Traction Control...................................................129
Trailer.................................................................130
Transmission.........................................................130
Installing Child Seats......................................18
Child Seats...............................................................18
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts............................18
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)..............................................21
Using Tether Straps..............................................23
Instrument Cluster........................................102
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................89
Interior Lamps..................................................93
Front Interior Lamp ..............................................93
Rear Interior Lamp................................................93
Interior Mirror...................................................98
Auto-Dimming Mirror...........................................98
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................254
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................255
Jump Starting......................................................256
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................254
Removing the Jumper Cables........................256
K
Keyless Entry....................................................73
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD...............................................................73
Keyless Starting.............................................158
Ignition Modes.....................................................158
Keys and Remote Controls..........................52
L
Lane Keeping System..................................214
Switching the System On and Off...................214
Lighting Control...............................................87
Headlamp Flasher................................................88
High Beams............................................................88
Lighting..............................................................87
General Information..............................................87
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services.......11
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers................231
Load Carrying.................................................231
Load Limit.......................................................232
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................239
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer................................................................232
424
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Information Provided by:
Locking and Unlocking.................................64
Activating Intelligent Access.............................66
Autolock Feature...................................................67
Autounlock Feature..............................................67
Battery Saver.........................................................68
Illuminated Entry...................................................68
Illuminated Exit......................................................68
Mechanical Key.....................................................65
Opening a Rear Door from Inside....................66
Power Door Locks................................................64
Remote Control.....................................................64
Smart Unlocks........................................................67
Welcome Lighting.................................................68
Locks..................................................................64
Luggage Covers............................................231
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................334
M
Maintenance..................................................282
General Information...........................................282
Manual Liftgate................................................69
Closing the Liftgate..............................................70
Opening the Liftgate............................................69
Media Hub.......................................................361
Memory Function..........................................144
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..............................145
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key...............145
Saving a PreSet Position...................................144
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................109
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors.................136
See: Windows and Mirrors.................................94
Mobile Communications Equipment...........14
Moonroof..........................................................99
Bounce-Back........................................................100
Opening and Closing the Moonroof..............100
Power Sunscreen................................................100
Venting the Moonroof........................................100
Motorcraft Parts............................................343
MyKey Troubleshooting................................62
MyKey™..............................................................57
Principle of Operation..........................................57
N
Normal Scheduled Maintenance...............371
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™...............................371
Maintenance Intervals.......................................373
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................289
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................288
Opening and Closing the Hood...............282
Opening the Hood.............................................282
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................263
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual............263
Overhead Console........................................157
P
Parking Aids....................................................192
Principle of Operation........................................192
Passive Anti-Theft System............................77
SecuriLock™.............................................................77
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.........................77
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™..............................40
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?...................................................................40
Post-Crash Alert System............................256
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking..............................64
425
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Information Provided by:
Power Liftgate..................................................70
Hands-Free Feature.............................................73
Obstacle Detection...............................................72
Opening and Closing the Liftgate.....................71
Setting the Liftgate Open Height......................72
Stopping the Liftgate Movement......................72
Power Seats....................................................142
Power Lumbar......................................................144
Power Windows..............................................94
Accessory Delay...................................................95
Bounce-Back..........................................................94
One-Touch Down..................................................94
One-Touch Up.......................................................94
Window Lock.........................................................95
Protecting the Environment..........................15
R
Rear Parking Aid............................................193
Rear Seat Armrest.........................................148
Rear Seats.......................................................145
Folding the Seatback.........................................146
Recline Adjustment.............................................146
Unfolding the Seatback.....................................146
Rear Under Floor Storage...........................231
Cargo Management System.............................231
Rear View Camera........................................199
Using the Rear View Camera System..........200
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera.....................................199
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............85
Rear Window Washer..........................................86
Rear Window Wiper.............................................85
Recommended Towing Weights...............241
Refueling.........................................................166
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System.....................167
Remote Control...............................................53
Car Finder...............................................................54
Intelligent Access Key.........................................53
Memory Feature....................................................56
Remote Start..........................................................54
Replacing the Battery..........................................53
Sounding a Panic Alarm......................................54
Remote Start...................................................137
Automatic Settings..............................................137
Removing a Headlamp...............................298
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..................310
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Collision Repairs....................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts........................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................56
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................264
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)......263
Roadside Assistance...................................252
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................253
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance.......................................................253
Vehicles Sold In the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................252
Vehicles Sold In the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................252
Roadside Emergencies...............................252
Roof Racks and Load Carriers...................231
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................249
Running Out of Fuel.....................................165
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................165
Filling a Portable Fuel Container.....................165
S
Safety Belt Height Adjustment....................34
Safety Belt Minder..........................................36
Belt-Minder™...........................................................36
Safety Belts......................................................30
Principle of Operation.........................................30
426
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Information Provided by:
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................35
Conditions of operation......................................36
Safety Canopy™...............................................48
Safety Precautions........................................163
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............379
Scheduled Maintenance.............................367
Seats.................................................................139
Security..............................................................77
Side Airbags.....................................................47
Sitting in the Correct Position....................139
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains..................................329
Special Notices.................................................13
New Vehicle Limited Warranty...........................13
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and Utility
Type Vehicles.....................................................13
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...........................13
Special Instructions...............................................13
Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance...............13
Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow...............13
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................375
Exceptions............................................................378
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control...........................................203
Stability Control.............................................190
Principle of Operation........................................190
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................159
Automatic Engine Shutdown...........................160
Failure to Start......................................................160
Fast Restart...........................................................159
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes...................161
Important Ventilating Information....................161
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving................................................................161
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary...........................................................161
Starting and Stopping the Engine.............158
General Information............................................158
Steering..........................................................225
Electric Power Steering....................................225
Steering Wheel................................................79
Storage Compartments................................157
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.......................................................99
Sun Visors.........................................................99
Illuminated Vanity Mirror.....................................99
Supplementary Restraints System..............41
Principle of Operation...........................................41
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
T
Tailgate
See: Manual Liftgate............................................69
See: Power Liftgate..............................................70
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications...............342
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).........................260
Ticket Holders................................................157
Tire Care..........................................................315
Glossary of Tire Terminology...........................316
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..............................................................315
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall.............................................................317
Temperature A B C..............................................316
Traction AA A B C................................................316
Treadwear.............................................................316
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.............330
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System..........................................331
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System ..............................................................331
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.......................................313
Towing a Trailer.............................................240
Load Placement..................................................240
427
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Information Provided by:
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........247
Emergency Towing.............................................247
Recreational Towing..........................................248
Towing.............................................................240
Traction Control.............................................188
Principle of Operation........................................188
Trailer Sway Control.....................................241
Transmission Code Designation..............345
Transmission...................................................172
Transmission
See: Transmission................................................172
Transporting the Vehicle.............................247
U
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™....................................................284
Under Hood Overview - 2.3L
EcoBoost™...................................................286
Universal Garage Door Opener................150
HomeLink Wireless Control System...............150
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................204
Automatic Cancellation....................................208
Blocked Sensor...................................................210
Canceling the Set Speed.................................208
Changing the Set Speed..................................208
Detection Issues.................................................209
Disengaging the System..................................207
Following a Vehicle...........................................205
Hilly Condition Usage.......................................208
Overriding the System......................................207
Resuming the Set Speed.................................208
Setting a Speed..................................................205
Setting the Gap Distance.................................206
Switching the System Off.................................208
Switching the System On.................................204
Switching to Normal Cruise Control................211
System Not Available.........................................210
Using All-Wheel Drive..................................178
Driving in Special Conditions With All-Wheel
Drive...................................................................178
Using Cruise Control...................................203
Switching Cruise Control Off...........................204
Switching Cruise Control On...........................203
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................62
Using Snow Chains......................................329
Using Stability Control..................................191
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
(RSC®)..................................................................191
Using Traction Control.................................188
Switching the System Off..................................188
System Indicator Lights and Messages.........188
Using a Switch.....................................................188
Using the Information Display Controls........188
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only)..............................................261
V
Vehicle Care..................................................304
General Information...........................................304
Vehicle Certification Label.........................344
Vehicle Identification Number...................344
Vehicle Storage...............................................311
Battery....................................................................312
Body.........................................................................311
Brakes....................................................................312
Cooling system....................................................312
Engine.....................................................................311
Fuel system............................................................311
General....................................................................311
Miscellaneous......................................................312
Removing Vehicle From Storage.....................312
Tires........................................................................312
428
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Information Provided by:
Ventilation
See: Climate Control...........................................133
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...............344
Voice Control....................................................81
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................104
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................104
Anti-Lock Braking System.................................104
Battery....................................................................104
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................104
Brake System.......................................................105
Cruise Control......................................................105
Direction Indicator..............................................105
Door Ajar...............................................................105
Electric Park Brake..............................................105
Engine Coolant Temperature...........................105
Engine Oil..............................................................105
Fasten Safety Belt...............................................105
Front Airbag..........................................................106
Heads Up Display...............................................106
High Beam............................................................106
Hood Ajar..............................................................106
Low Fuel Level.....................................................106
Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................106
Low Washer Fluid................................................106
Parking Lamps.....................................................106
Powertrain Fault..................................................106
Service Engine Soon..........................................107
Stability Control....................................................107
Stability Control Off.............................................107
Washer Fluid Check....................................293
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................304
See: Wipers and Washers...................................83
Waxing............................................................305
Welcome Lighting...........................................92
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................334
Wheels and Tires...........................................313
General Information............................................313
Technical Specifications...................................340
Windows and Mirrors.....................................94
Windshield Washers......................................85
Windshield Wipers..........................................83
Intermittent Wipe..................................................83
Speed dependent wipers...................................83
Wipers and Washers......................................83
Wrecker Towing
See: Transporting the Vehicle.........................247
429
MKC (TME), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Information Provided by:

Navigation menu